Home

Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup-Archive Client

1. Parameters No Scrolls to the end of the list and stops This is the default Yes Stops and waits after displaying the number of lines you specified with the scrolllines option The following prompt displays at the bottom of the screen Press Q to quit C to continuous scroll or Enter to continue Examples Options file scrollprompt yes Command line scrollp yes This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 133 Subdir The subdir option specifies whether you want to include subdirectories of named directories for processing on the following commands archive delete archive incremental if the file specification is not a domain query archive query backup query backupset restore restore backupset retrieve selective For example if you specify subdir yes when backing up a specific path and file Tivoli Storage Manager recursively backs up all subdirectories under that path and any instances of the specified file that exist under any of those subdirectories Notes 1 2 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt No SUbdir gt _Yes Parameters No Yes Subdirectories are not processed This is the default Subdirectories are processed B
2. Option Description Page compression Specifies whether to compress files before ba sending them to the server dirmc Specifies the management class to use for B6 directories If not specified Tivoli Storage Manager uses the management class with the longest retention period domain Specifies the volumes to include in your default 87 client domain for an incremental backup exclude These options are equivalent Use these options to b3 exclude backup exclude a file or group of files from backup exclude file services exclude file backup exclude archive Excludes a file or group of files from archive services exclude compression Excludes files from compression processing if compression yes is specified This option applies to backups and archives exclude dir Excludes the directory you specify its files and all its subdirectories and their files from backup processing exclude encrypt Excludes specified files from encryption processing inclexcl Specifies the path and file name of an bai include exclude options file include These options are equivalent Use these options to p8 include backup include files or assign management classes for include file backup processing include archive include compression Includes files or assigns management classes for archive processing Includes files for compression processing if you specify compression yes This option applies to backups and a
3. 92 93 96 97 s 98 100 101 102 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 112 113 114 116 17 118 119 120 lt 121 122 s 123 lt 125 126 127 128 129 130 132 133 134 136 137 138 139 140 141 Tcepwindowsize Timeformat Txnbytelimit Verbose Virtualnodename Webports Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands Entering Options with a Canai Command Line Options Reference Archmc Deletefiles Description Detail Dirsonly Filelist Filesonly Fromdate Fromnode Fromtime Ifnewer Inactive Incrbydate Latest Location Noprompt Optfile Pick Pitdate Pittime Preservepath Todate Totime V2archive Volinformation Chapter 11 Using Commands Starting and Ending a Client Command Session Process Commands in Batch Mode Process Commands in Interactive Mode Entering Client Commands Command Name Options Parameters File Specification Syntax Maximum File Size for Operations Remembering Previous Commands Using Wildcard Characters Entering Commands Client Commands Reference Archive Cancel Restore Delete Access Delete Archive Delete Filespace Expire Help Incremental Loop 142 143 144 145 146 147 149 149 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 x 169 170 171 172
4. y NWUSer servername user password gt lt Parameters servername A 1 to 48 character NetWare server name to which your client node has access user A 1 to 48 character NetWare user name with supervisor authority on the NetWare server password A 1 to 128 character password for a user with supervisor authority on the NetWare server Examples Options file nwus servera supervisor secret To specify a user ID and password to back up an NDS tree you would enter nwuser treea admin ibm secret where treea is the NDS tree name Command line nwuser serverb mary secretl 110 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 111 Nwwaitonerror The nwwaitonerror option specifies that the client program responds in one of the following ways if an error occurs while exiting e Display an error message and wait before returning to the NetWare console e Return immediately to the NetWare console Note You can use the nwwaitonerror option when running DSMC in an automated mode such as from an NCF file By default you are asked to press any key to continue before you exit the DSMC program If you specify yes DSMC will not prompt Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax Yes gt gt NWW
5. 2 Processing moves to Rule 2 and checks This time file servera data foo obj matches the current file name that is being processed Processing stops the option is checked and it is include Chapter 2 Configuring IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 13 3 File servera data foo dev test obj is backed up Example 2 Assume that servera data is defined as the domain and that you defined the following statements for the exclude and include options exclude servera obj include servera data foo obj exclude servera data foo junk obj The current file being processed is servera data widg copyit bat Processing follows these steps 1 Rule 3 is checked and finds no match 2 Rule 2 is checked and finds no match 3 Rule 1 is checked and finds no match 4 Because a match is not found file servera data widg copyit bat is implicitly included and is backed up Example 3 Assume that servera data is defined as the domain and that you defined the following statements for the exclude and include options exclude servera obj include servera data foo obj exclude servera data foo junk obj The current file that processes is servera data 1lib objs printf obj Processing follows these steps Rule 3 is checked and finds no match Rule 2 is checked and finds no match Rule 1 is checked and a match is found Processing stops the option is checked and it is exclude File servera data 1ib objs printf obj is no
6. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 TCP IP Options Node Options Backup and Archive Processing Options Restore and Retrieve Processing Options Scheduling Options Format and Language Options Command Processing Options Authorization Options Error Processing Options Transaction Processing Options Web Client Options Client Command Options Entering Commands Commands Command Recall and Edit Functions Wildcard Characters 70 70 70 72 3 72 SAO 73 74 74 sd b eda 149 181 181 185 186 vii viii Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both AIX Scalable POWERparallel IBM SP2 IBMLink 390 OS 390 System 390 RACF VisualAge RISC System 6000 z OS RS 6000 UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows NET and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both Jaz and Zip are trademarks or registered trademarks of lomega Corporation in the United States other countries or both Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States other countrie
7. Chapter 4 Backing Up Your Data 39 In addition you can selectively back up or archive files stored on a remote server For example load dsmc selective servb sys test load dsmc archive servc sys test2 projl Backing Up Files Additional Topics This section discusses additional topics related to performing backups You do not need to understand this information in order to do basic work Understanding How Files Are Managed Tivoli Storage Manager uses management classes to determine how to manage your backups on the server Every time you back up a file the file is assigned a management class The management class used is either a default chosen for you or one you assigned to the file using the include option in the include exclude list The chosen management class must contain a backup copy group in order for the file to be backed up See Cha A information on management classes and how to en them to files Understanding Which Files Are Backed Up When you request a selective backup Tivoli Storage Manager backs up a file if all of the following requirements are met e The file is not specified on an exclude statement in your include exclude list If you do not have an include exclude list all files are considered for backup e The selected management class contains a backup copy group e The file meets the serialization requirements defined in the backup copy group If serialization is static or shared static and the
8. North Carolina If you have the required username and password you can get maintenance information from the Tivoli Storage Manager support page at http www tivoli com support storage_mgr tivolimain html Contacting Customer Support For support for this or any Tivoli product you can contact Tivoli Customer Support in one of the following ways e Visit the Tivoli Storage Manager technical support Web site at http www tivoli com support storage_mgr tivolimain html e Submit a problem management record PMR electronically at IBMSERV IBMLINK You can access the IBMLINK from the IBM Web site at http www ibmlink ibm com Chapter 3 Getting Started 25 e Submit a problem management record PMR electronically from the Tivoli Web site at http www tivoli com support e Send e mail to support tivoli com Customers in the United States can also call 1 800 TIVOLI8 1 800 848 6548 For product numbers 5697 TS9 5697 DRS or 5697 DPM call 1 800 237 5511 International customers should consult the Tivoli Web site for customer support telephone numbers If you have a problem with any Tivoli product you can contact Tivoli Customer Support See the Tivoli Customer Support Handbook at the following Web site http www tivoli com support handbook When you contact Tivoli Customer Support be prepared to provide identification information for your company so that support personnel can readily assist you Company identific
9. This option differs from the filesonly option in that the filesonly option archives the directories that exist in the path of the source file specification The v2archive and dirsonly options are mutually exclusive and an error message displays if you use both options in the same archive command This option is not persistent you must explicitly specify this option in each archive command If you use this option you may want to consider the following e You may experience performance problems when retrieving large amounts of data archived with this option e You may want to use this option only if you are concerned about expiration performance on a server that already contains extremely large amounts of archived data Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt V2archive gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples This command dsmc archive sys relx dirl v2archive su y Archives these files sys relx dirl filel sys relx dirl file2 sys relx dirl file3 sys relx dirl dir2 file4 sys relx dirl dir2 file5 Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not archive sys relx dirl and sys relx dirl dir2 Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 179 Volinformation The volinformation option backs up or archives root level information For the NetWare file server volinformation handles volume restrictions and volume root level trustee information
10. Tivoli Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Version 5 Release 1 GC32 0786 00 Tivoli Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Version 5 Release 1 GC32 0786 00 Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the general information under First Edition March 2002 This edition applies to version 5 release 1 modification 0 of Tivoli Storage Manager 5697 ISM 5698 ISM Tivoli Storage Manager Enterprise Edition 5697 ISE 5698 ISE and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Order publications through your Tivoli representative or the Tivoli branch office that serves your locality Tivoli welcomes your comments You can send us comments about this book electronically at pubs tivoli com Information sent grants Tivoli a nonexclusive right to use or distribute it in any way Tivoli believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1993 2002 All rights reserved US Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Tables 1 ww ew we ee ee ee VEF Trademarks 2 IX About This Book Xi Conventions Used in This Book X Reading
11. description filelist noprompt pick For more information about command line options see You can use the subdir common option with the delete archive command For information about common options see filespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to delete from storage Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all files in a directory You can also enter up to 20 file specifications in a command DIRectory or NDS Specifies that you want to delete the archived NDS Examples Task Delete a file named budget Command dsmc del arch sys user plan proj1 budget Task Delete all files archived from the sys user plan projl directory with a file extension of txt Command dsmc del arch sys user plan projl txt Task Delete files archived from the sys user project directory using the pick option Command dsmc d ar sys user project pick 190 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Delete Filespace The delete filespace command deletes file spaces from server storage A file space is a logical space on the server that contains files you backed up or archived Tivoli Storage Manager assigns a separate file space on the server for each workstation drive from which you back up or archive files The file space name is the same as the drive label name When you enter the delete filespace command a list of your file spaces displays From this list selec
12. exclude servera swapper dat exclude nl io sys exclude tfr spart par exclude nw2 sys budget fin exclude nw6 sys devel exclude archive servera events log exclude compression nw6 sys devel exclude encrypt servera gordon dat Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 95 Httpport The httpport option specifies a TCP IP port address for the Web client Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Tivoli Storage Manager Firewall Support The webports option enables the use of the Web client outside a firewall by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon and Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI The ports you specify with the webports option and the client option httpport must be opened in the firewall To enable the backup archive client Command Line Admin client and the Scheduler running in polling mode to run outside a firewall the port specified by the server option tcpport default 1500 must be opened in the firewall Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outside a firewall Tepport on page 140 Webports on page 147 for more information See for further considerations See and regardin Tivoli Gaia e ean er firewall su se 8 8 8 8 pp Options File Place this option in the client options f
13. format_number Displays time in one of the formats listed below Select the format number that corresponds to the format you want to use 1 23 00 00 This is the default 2 23 00 00 3 23 00 00 4 12 00 00 A P Examples Options file timeformat 4 Command line time 3 Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 143 Txnbytelimit The txnbytelimit option specifies the number of kilobytes the client program buffers before it sends a transaction to the server Note The server can also define and adjust this option during self tuning operations A transaction is the unit of work exchanged between the client and server Because the client program can transfer more than one file or directory between the client and server before it commits the data to server storage a transaction can contain more than one file or directory This is called a transaction group This option permits you to control the amount of data sent between the client and server before the server commits the data and changes to the server database thus changing the speed with which the client performs work The amount of data sent applies when files are batched together during backup or when receiving files from the server during a restore procedure The server administrator can limit the number of files or directories contained within a transaction group using the txngroupmax option the actual size of a transaction can be less than your limit Once this number is r
14. or abefjrs The pattern ab rs matches abcdrs abzzrs but does not match abrs abjrs or abkkkrs The match all character For example The pattern ab matches ab abb abxxx but does not match a b aa bb The pattern ab rs matches abrs abtrs abrsrs but does not match ars or aabrs abrss The pattern ab ef rs matches abefrs abefghrs but does not match abefr abers The pattern abcd matches abcd c abcd txt but does not match abcd abcdc or abcdtxt The match n character matches zero or more directories The directory separator character limits the scope of the search for the matching n characters and directories If a pattern does not begin with a directory separator or one does not follow the drive specification a match all directories is appended to the pattern For example these patterns are equivalent sys syS Note that both characters and can be used as a directory delimiter The open character class character begins the enumeration of a character class For example xxx abc matches xxxa xxxb or xxxc The character class range includes characters from the first character to the last character specified For example xxx a z matches xxxa XXXxD XXXC XXXZ The literal escape character When used within a character class it causes the next character to be treated literally When used outside a character class it is used as a directory
15. 173 174 177 178 179 180 181 182 182 183 183 183 183 184 184 185 185 186 186 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 198 Macro Query Access Query Archive Query Backup Query Backupset Query Filespace Query Inclexcl Query Mgmtclass Query Restore Query Schedule Query Session Query TSA Restart Restore Restore ee Restore Backupset Retrieve Schedule Selective Set Access Set Password Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare Backup and Recovery Guide NDS Backup Considerations Storage Management Services Tivoli Storage Manager and NDS Naming Conventions for NDS Objects NDS Backup Using Tivoli Storage Manager Specifying the Entire NDS for Backup Specifying NDS Objects for oe Restore andl a 8 oe 2229 Queries Include Exclude Processing User Rights Required to Backup or Restore NDS Conventions for Logging into a NetWare Server Schema Backup or Restore Server Specific Information NDS Specific Backup Issues Partitions 2 43 Replicas Schema F Object References Server Centric IDs Server References Current Backup Limitations Backup Recommendations Testing Considerations NDS Restore Considerations Example 1 Loss of a Non SYS Volume Example 2 Loss of a SYS Volume or Entire Server Example 2a Single Server Network Example 2b Multiple Server Network replica present Example 2c Multiple Ser
16. 19 Starting a Web Client Session 20 Setting User Privileges Beh Bk Oe Installing and Using the Web Client Boke wk k ee Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 Accessing the NetWare Server Sorting File Lists Displaying Online Help Ending a Session Online Forum Other Sources of Online Help Contacting Customer Support Chapter 4 Backing Up Your Data A Checklist to Help Plan Your Backups Encryption Do You Want to Back Up or Archive Files Backing Up Files and Directories Understanding Which Files are Backed Up Full Incremental Backup Incremental By Date Backup Full Incremental versus Partial Incremental Incremental by date Backups Selective Backup Support for Long Names Running an Incremental Backup on a Memory Constrained Machine p Using the Include Exclude List to Contiol Processing Performing Command Tine Backups Using the Web Client to Back Up Data Backing Up Open Files Requesting Backup and Archive Services for Remote Servers Backing Up Files Additional Topics Understanding How Files Are Managed Understanding Which Files Are Backed Up Chapter 5 Restoring Your Data No Query Restore Standard Restore Process No Query Restore Process Performing a Command Line Restore Do You Want To Restore an Active or Inactive Backup Performing Large Restore Operations Performing a Point in Time Restore Using the Web Client to Restore Files Rest
17. Parameters file_name Specifies an alternate client options file if you use the fully qualified path name If you specify only the file name Tivoli Storage Manager assumes you want the current directory The default is dsm opt Examples Command line dsmc query session optfile sys tsm spike opt This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 170 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Pick The pick option creates a list of backup versions or archive copies that match the file specification you enter From the list you can select the versions to process Include the inactive option to view both active and inactive objects Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax p gt gt PIck bl Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc restore sys project pick inactive Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 171 Pitdate Use the pitdate option with the pittime option to establish a point in time for which you want to display or restore the latest version of your backups Files that were backed up on or before the date and time you specified and which were not deleted before the date and time you specified are processed Backup versions that you create after this date and time are ignored Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does
18. QDR where lt vol gt is the volume on which the print queues reside If you want to process the actual queued print jobs you can include these by specifying the following include statement in your dsm opt file INLCUDE lt vol gt QUEUES QDR Q Note Do not use the exclude dir statement to exclude the print queue directories because this will exclude the directory entries from processing Print Queue Restore Procedures Local Print Servers PSERVER NLM If the print server drivers reside locally on the NetWare server i e PSERVER NLM there are no explicit steps to restore the print environment if you use the include exclude recommendations in x 2 You can restore the print environment using the restore procedures in this chapter e Restoring the NDS will restore the printer print server and print queue objects e Restoring the NetWare volumes will restore the proper directory entries e Loading PSERVER NLM usually in autoexec ncf will ensure the creation of the proper files in the print server directories Network Print Servers Network cards e g HP s JetDirect can provide print server services which attach directly to the network In such environments PSERVER NLM is not used and special explicit considerations must be made to recreate the necessary SRV and SYS files in the print queue directories To explicitely create these files after all other restore procedures have been accomplished use the following ste
19. R reboot To restart the operating system registration The process of identifying a client node or administrator to the server by specifying a user ID password and contact information For client nodes a policy domain compression status and deletion privileges are also specified restore A function that permits users to copy a version of a backup file from the storage pool to a workstation or file server The backup copy in the storage pool is not affected Contrast with backup retention The amount of time in days that inactive backed up or archived files are retained in the storage pool before they are deleted The following copy group attributes define retention retain extra versions retain only version retain version retrieve A function permitting users to copy an archived file from the storage pool to the workstation or file server The archive copy in the storage pool is not affected Contrast with archive 250 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide S scheduling mode The type of scheduling operation for the client server node Tivoli Storage Manager supports two scheduling modes client polling and server prompted scroll Move through a list of items in a window by operating the scrollbars with the mouse cursor select Choose an item from a list or group of items selective backup A function permitting users to back up specified files These files are not exclud
20. Scheduling Options Option Description managedservices Specifies the services to be managed by the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor maxcmdretries Specifies the maximum number of times the client scheduler attempts to process a scheduled command that fails postschedulecmd Specifies a command to process after running a schedule preschedulecmd Specifies a command to process before running a schedule queryschedperiod Specifies the number of hours the client scheduler waits between unsuccessful attempts to contact the server for scheduled work El Eg el E ge retryperiod Specifies the number of minutes the client scheduler waits between attempts to process a scheduled command that fails or between unsuccessful attempts to report results to the server El schedcmddisabled Specifies whether to disable the scheduling of generic commands specified by your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator Al schedlogname Specifies the name of the file where schedule log information is stored schedlogretention Specifies the number of days to keep log file entries in the schedule log and whether to save pruned entries schedmode Specifies which schedule mode to use polling or prompted 72 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide El Bl Table 19 Scheduling Options continued Option Description Page tcpclien
21. Use the following NetWare console command for each volume you want to restore load dsmc restore sys subdir yes replace all volinfo Where SYS is the name of the failed volume 10 Verify restoration of the NDS file data and trustee data Example 2c Multiple Server Network Replica not present This example can be used in a situation in which the SYS volume or entire server is lost and partitions contained on the server were not replicated In this example you must restore any partitions that were not replicated NDS objects which referenced the failed Server object and failed Volume object s and the volume data including trustee data The following steps are necessary for recovery 1 If the failed server contains any Master partitions which was replicated reassign the master to another server using the DSREPAIR utility 2 Replace the failed hard disk s 3 Reinstall the NetWare OS and NDS on the server If a backup copy of the server specific information is available install the NetWare OS See Server for more information If a backup copy of the server Te morao is not available use the NWCONFIG NLM utility on NetWare with the following precautions e Use the same server name in the install e Use the same admin parent container and password as the last NDS backup e Ensure all hard disk partitions are at least as large as they were on the failed server e Use the same volume names as on the failed serv
22. both or neither A backup copy group contains attributes that are used during the backup process to determine e Whether a file that has changed since the last backup is backed up again e How many days must elapse before a file is backed up again e How a file is processed during a backup if it is in use It also contains attributes to manage the backup versions of your files on the server These attributes control e Where the server stores backup versions of your files and directories e How many backup versions the server keeps of your files and directories e How long the server keeps backup versions of your files and directories An archive copy group contains attributes that control e Whether a file is archived if it is in use e Where the server stores archived copies of your files e How long the server keeps archived copies of your files When the server is unable to rebind a file to an appropriate management class the server uses one of two values to determine the number of days to retain the file If it is a backup version the server uses backup grace period retention If it is an archive copy the server uses archive grace period retention For more information about grace periods see Displaying Information about Management Classes and Copy Groups Use the detail option on the query mgmtclass command to view the available management classes able 14 on page 641 shows the default values for the backup and ar
23. dsmc archive des 2002 Budget for Proj 1 Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 155 Detail The detail option displays detailed information about each management class in your active policy set If you do not use the detail option only the management class name and a brief description displays If you specify the detail option information about attributes in each copy group contained in each management class will display A management class can contain a backup copy group an archive copy group both or neither Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt DETail gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc query mgmtclass detail dsmc query filespace detail 156 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Dirsonly The dirsonly option processes directories only The client does not process files Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt DIrsonly Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc query backup dirsonly sys Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 157 Filelist Use the filelist option to process a list of files The Tivoli Storage Manager client opens the file you specify with this option and processes the list of files within according to the speci
24. if you change the management class both active and inactive versions are bound again to the new management class If the backup copy group for the management class specifies keeping multiple backup versions of the file and you request multiple backups the server always has one active backup version the current version and one or more inactive backup versions of the file All backup versions of a file are bound to the same management class and are managed based on the attributes in the backup copy group When you archive a file for the first time Tivoli Storage Manager binds it to the default management class to the management class specified in your include exclude list or to a management class you specify when modifying your archive options during an archive Archived files are never rebound to a different management class If you change the management class for a file any previous copies of the file that you archived remain bound to the management class specified when you archived them Rebinding Backup Versions of Files Backups of files are bound again to a different management class in the following conditions In each condition the files active and inactive are not bound again until the next backup e You specify a different management class in an Include statement to change the management class for the file The backups are managed based on the old management class until you run another backup e Your administrator
25. tcpserveraddress option 141 tcpwindowsize option 142 timeformat option 143 Tivoli Storage Manager client components NetWare client 2 communication methods NetWare client 2 configuring 5 establishing communications through firewall 96 140 hardware requirements NetWare client 2 migrating from earlier versions 1 password 18 server publications 3 software requirements NetWare client 2 V4 2 client server communication changes 1 todate option 177 totime option 178 transaction processing 144 summary of options 75 TSA information displaying 210 txnbytelimit option 144 U UNIX restrictions memory required for client processing 31 using options with commands 149 using options client 183 client command 183 V v2archive option 179 verbose option 145 versions data deleted attribute 62 exists attribute 61 virtualnodename option 146 volinformation option 180 volume restriction with Mac and DOS name spaces 32 W Web client enable to run in a Swing enabled browser 20 establishing communications through firewall 23 96 specifying TCP IP port address for 96 starting 20 summary of options 75 supported browsers 20 unsupported functions 38 51 using through a firewall 147 using to archive data 50 using to retrieve archived data 52 Web client GUI performing full incremental backup 37 performing incremental by date backup 37 performing selective backup 37 webports option 147 wildcard characters include or
26. up to 20 file specifications in a command separating the file specifications with a space DIRectory or NDS Specifies that you want to back up the NDS To back up the entire directory specify dir su y To back up one container in the directory specify dir o nds_object An NDS object can contain container objects and leaf objects In all examples you may enter nds instead of dir Examples Task Back up the proja file in the sys u devel directory Command dsmc selective sys u devel proja Task Back up all files in the sys u devel directory whose file names begin with proj Command dsmc selective sys u devel proj Task Back up all files in the sys u devel directory whose file names begin with proj Back up the single file named budget in the sys user directory Command dsmc selective sys u devel proj sys user budget Task Back up the entire NDS Command dsmc s t9 dir su y Task Back up the tfr organization container of the NDS Command dsmc t9 dir o tfr su y 222 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Set Access Syntax gt SET OERE T Archive filespec o ekp user options The set access command gives users at other nodes access to your backup versions or archived copies You can give another user access to a specific file multiple files or all files in a directory When you give access to another user that user can restore or retrieve
27. 126 schedemddisabled 127 schedlogname 128 schedlogretention 129 schedmode 130 scrolllines 132 scrollprompt 133 specifying in commands 75 subdir 134 tapeprompt 136 tcpbuffsize 137 tcpclientaddress 138 tcpclientport 139 tcpport 140 tcpserveraddress 141 tcpwindowsize 142 timeformat 143 todate 177 totime 178 transaction processing summary 75 txnbytelimit 144 using options with commands 149 v2archive 179 verbose 145 virtualnodename 146 volinformation 180 Web client summary 75 webports 147 overriding the client options file 149 P parameters command optional 184 required 184 partial incremental incremental by date running 36 password changing 225 saving a NetWare 19 setting for client 7 using 18 password option 113 passwordaccess option 114 passworddir option 116 performance restore operations 43 transaction options 75 transaction processing 144 permissions deleting 189 pick option 171 pitdate 172 pittime option 173 point in time 44 policies storage management 59 policy domains default policy domain 59 standard policy domain 59 policy sets active policy set 59 portable media restoring backup sets 46 postnschedulecmd options 117 postschedulecmd options 117 prenschedulecmd option 118 preschedulecmd option 118 preservepath option 174 processing options authorization 74 backup and archive 70 central scheduling 72 communication 69 error processing 74 format and language 73 node option 70 restore and re
28. 181 Table 28 Commands continued Command Description Page query mgmtclass Displays information about available management classes BI query restore Displays a list of your restartable restore sessions 207 in the server database query schedule Displays information about scheduled events 208 query session Displays information about the current session 209 query tsa Displays information about current TSA bid restart restore Displays a list of restartable restore sessions and AE permits you to select one to restart restore Restores backup versions from Tivoli Storage bial Manager storage restore backupset Restores a backup set from the server or a local bid file retrieve Retrieves archived files from Tivoli Storage bial Manager storage schedule Starts the client scheduler on the workstation baal selective Backs up selected files bail set access Authorizes another user to access your backup b23l versions or archive copies set password Changes the Tivoli Storage Manager password for baal your workstation Starting and Ending a Client Command Session You can start or end a client command session in either batch mode or interactive mode Use batch mode when you want to enter a single client command Tivoli Storage Manager processes the command and returns to the command prompt Use interactive mode when you want to enter a series of commands Since Tivoli Storag
29. 59 Specify the time in the format you selected with the timeformat option When you include the timeformat option in a command it must precede the fromtime pittime and totime options Examples Command line dsmc q b timeformat 4 fromt 11 59AM fromd 06 30 99 tot 11 59PM tod 06 30 99 Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 163 lfnewer The ifnewer option replaces an existing file with the backup if the backup is newer than the existing file Only active backups are considered unless you also use the inactive or latest options Note This option is ignored if the replace option is set to No Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt I FNewer gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc restore ifnewer sys u id projb 164 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Inactive Use the inactive option with the restore and query backup commands and the pick option to display both active and inactive objects You can also use the pick option to display backup versions and archive copies that match the file specification you enter Only active backups are considered unless you also use either the inactive or the latest option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax p gt gt INActive gt lt Parameters There a
30. 63 character password A password is not case sensitive Valid characters include Characters Description A Z Any letter A through Z uppercase or lowercase 0 9 Any number 0 through 9 Plus Period L Underscore Hyphen amp Ampersand Examples Options file password secretword Command line password secretword This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 113 Passwordaccess The passwordaccess option specifies whether you want to generate your password automatically or set as a user prompt Your administrator can require a password for your client node by enabling the authentication feature Ask your administrator if a password is required for your client node If a password is required you can choose to e Set the password for your client node yourself and have Tivoli Storage Manager prompt for it each time you request services e Let Tivoli Storage Manager automatically generate a new password for your client node each time it expires encrypt and store the password in a file and retrieve the password from that file when you request services You are not prompted for the password Use the passworddir option in your client options file dsm opt to specify the directory location in which to store the encrypted password file The default directory location depends on how the client was installed When the passwordaccess option is se
31. 70 Node Option gh tee ry 3 LO Backup and Archive Processing Options ig we ZO Restore and Retrieve Processing Options 72 Scheduling Options ee ee wk oh he Format and Language Options sy POR dr 4 oe 2273 Command Processing Options Authorization Options Error Processing Options Transaction Processing Options Web Client Options Using Options with Commands Entering Options with a Command Client Options Reference Changingretries Commmethod Commrestartduration Commrestartinterval Compressalways Compression Dateformat Dirmc Domain Editor Encryptkey Errorlogname Errorlogretention Exclude Options Httpport Inclexcl Include Options Language Largecommbuffers Managedservices Maxcmdretries Memoryefficientbackup Nodename Numberformat Nwignorecompressbit Nwpwfile Nwuser Nwwaitonerror Password Passwordaccess Passworddir Postschedulecmd Preschedulecmd Processorutilization Queryschedperiod Quiet Replace Res urceutilization Retryperiod Revokeremoteaccess Schedcmddisabled Schedlogname Schedlogretention Schedmode Scrolllines Scrollprompt Subdir Tapeprompt Tepbuffsize Tepclientaddress Tepclientport Tepport Tepserveraddress iv Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide 73 74 74 20 lt 75 vf 76 77 78 29 80 81 82 83 85 86 87 89 90 91
32. 9 VOL1 was last backed up with the file space type of NTWFS or DOS name space When Tivoli Storage Manager starts a full incremental of VOL1 it detects that VOL1 has both Mac and long name spaces but that the data is backed up using the DOS name space This causes the file space to be updated to the long name space Even though both Mac and long are loaded Tivoli Storage Manager chooses the long name space because the Mac name space is not supported After a full incremental backup the following change displays tsm gt q file D Node Name VONORE Session established with server TSM Windows NT Server Version 5 Release 1 Level 0 Server date time 10 05 2000 05 59 45 Last access 10 01 2000 20 34 09 Num Last incr Date Type File Space Name 1 10 01 2000 18 34 46 NTW LONG PROD1 VOL1 tsm gt ey The file space type changes from NTWFS to NTW LONG The client uses the long name space during the next full incremental backup The file space is converted to use the long name space All active and inactive files are changed to the following r gt tsm lt Q BACKUP VOL1 SUB YES Size Backup Date Mgmt Class A I File 02 05 1999 06 33 28 STANDARD A VOL1 02 05 1999 06 29 49 STANDARD A VOL1 DELETED SAV 0 02 05 1999 06 29 49 STANDARD A VOL1 Frank Ramke 1 175 02 05 1999 06 29 49 DEFAULT A VOL1 VOL LOG ERR O 02 05 1999 06 29 49 STANDARD A VOL1 Frank Ramke Debbie Ramke 02 05 1999 06 29 49 STANDARD A VO
33. Down arrow keys If you set the editor option to no the feature to recall previous commands is not active If the editor and command retrieve functions are not working on a specific workstation setting you should turn off the editor option For more information regarding the editor option see Pressing the Up arrow key displays the previous command in memory Pressing the Down arrow key displays the next command in memory Table 29 lists other functions you can perform when you recall commands Table 29 Command Recall and Edit Functions Function Press Display the previous command in memory Up arrow Display the next command in memory Down arrow Move to the beginning of the command Home Move to the end of the command End Move to the left Left arrow Move to the right Right arrow Move five spaces to the right Tab right Delete a character to the right of the cursor Delete Delete a character to the left of the cursor Backspace Insert a character Toggle the Insert key Finish or execute the command Enter Clear the current line Esc End the program CTRL C End the program QQ Scheduler or Incremental Backup Restore Chapter 11 Using Commands 185 Using Wildcard Characters In a command you can use wildcard characters in the file name or file extension only You cannot use them to specify destination files volume names server names or NDS names Use wildcard characters wh
34. Processing E exclude encrypt Excludes files from encryption processing w a include encrypt Includes files for encryption processing Excluding System Files We recommend that you have the following minimum include exclude list in your client options file dsm opt Log files SYS VOL LOG ERR SYS TTS LOG ERR SYS SYSTEM SYS LOG ERR SYS SYSTEM EVENTS LOG SYS SYSTEM SECAUDIT LOG SYS SYSTEM SYSTEM LOG General files that NetWare programs always accessed and that cannot be opened for reading SYS SYSTEM CMASTER DBA SYS SYSTEM BTRIEVE TRN SYS SYSTEM TSA TSA TEMP Including and Excluding Groups of Files To specify groups of files that you want to include or exclude use the wildcard characters listed in ble Zon paga 1 This table applies to include and exclude statements only For information about using wildcard characters in Tivoli Storage Manager commands see 10 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Table 7 Wildcard and Other Special Characters Character Function The match one character matches any single character except the directory separator it does not match the end of the string For example The pattern ab matches abc but does not match ab abab or abzzz The pattern ab rs matches abfrs but does not match abrs or abllrs e The pattern ab ef rs matches abdefjrs but does not match abefrs abdefrs
35. Syntax Diagrams X Related Publications XV Summary of Changes for Tivoli Storage Manager XVvii Technical Changes for Version 5 1 Apal 2002 xvii Chapter 1 Installing IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Migrating from Earlier A Upgrade Path for Clients and Servers Changes to Client Server Communications Additional Migration Information NetWare Client Environment Client Components Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Communications Methods SMS Software Requirements Installing the Client Program Required Installing from CD ROM Tivoli Storage Manager Server installations snd Configuration WWNHNNNNNNRPRH W Chapter 2 Configuring IBM Tivoli Storage Manager E OS Updating AUTOEXEC NCF Required oo ok ae aD Creating and Mee the Client Options File Required Be ahd Setting Options i in the Client Options File 26 Registering Your Workstation with a Server a ay 7 7 Using Closed Registration s amp apa 27 Using Open Registration oe AO Creating an Include Exclude List Optional 8 Using Include Exclude Options ia 8 Processing Include and Exclude Options 12 Accessing Remote NetWare Servers 15 Chapter 3 Getting Started 17 Tivoli Storage Manager Client Authentication 17 Starting a Session 18 Using Batch Mode I8 Using Interactive Mode
36. The pitdate and pittime values are mutually exclusive from the todate and totime parameters Using the Web Client to Restore Files Your administrator determines how many backup versions Tivoli Storage Manager maintains for each file on your workstation Frequently the administrator maintains more than one version of each file Having multiple versions of a file permits you to restore older versions in the event the most recent backup is damaged Tivoli Storage Manager considers the most recent backup version to be the active version Any other backup version is considered to be an inactive version To restore a backup version that is inactive you must display both active and inactive versions by clicking on Display Active Inactive Files on the View menu If you try to restore both an active and inactive version of a file at the same time only the active version will be restored To restore your backup versions 1 Click on Restore on the main window The Restore by Tree window displays 2 Expand the directory tree by clicking on the sign Click the selection boxes next to the object or objects you want to back up 3 To modify specific restore options click the Options button Any options you change are effective during the current session only 4 Click Restore The Restore Destination window displays Enter the appropriate information in the Restore Destination window 5 Click Restore The Restore Task List window displays the
37. Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon and Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI Values for both the Client Acceptor daemon and the Web Client Agent service are required If you do not specify this option the default value zero 0 is used for both ports This causes TCP IP to randomly assign a free port number for the Client Acceptor daemon and the Web Client Agent service The ports you specify with the webports and httpport options must be opened in the firewall To enable the backup archive client Command Line Admin client and the Scheduler running in polling mode to run outside a firewall the port specified by the server option tcpport default 1500 must be opened in the firewall Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outside a firewall To enable the administrative Web interface to run outside a firewall the port specified by server option httpport default is 1580 must be opened in the firewall considerations ETE Tivoli oe Manager fnewell support 2 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax p gt gt WEBPorts cadport agentport gt lt Parameters cadport Specifies the required Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon port number If a value is not specified the default zero 0 causes TCP IP to randomly assign
38. Tivoli Storage Manager backs up a file if all of the following requirements are met e The file is not specified in an exclude statement in your include exclude list If you do not have an include exclude list all files are considered eligible for backup e The selecied management class contains a backup copy group See Chapter 7 on page 53 for more information on management classes ai SR copy groups e The file meets the serialization requirements defined in the backup copy group If serialization is static or shared static and the file is in use each time Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to back it up the file is not backed up See L e The file meets the mode requirements defined in the bad copy group If the mode is modified the file must have changed since the last backup If the mode is absolute the file can be backed up even if it has not changed See for more information e The file meets the frequency requirements defined in the backup copy group The minimum number of days since the last backup must elapse before a file is backed up See more information egnene is nord for partial incrementals The the server can also define include exclude statements in the include exclude list To view the contents of your include exclude list use the query inclexcl command Attention When you run an incremental backup the client also backs up all directory information When you back up a file the directories in th
39. about client options see Chanter 9 Tising e Client command options Use this group of options with specific commands on the command line only able 24 on nage 149 provides an alphabetical list of the command line options a brief description and the commands with which they are used Chapter 11 Using Commands 183 Parameters Commands can have required parameters optional parameters or no parameters at all Required parameters provide information to perform a task The most commonly required parameter is a file specification For example if you want to archive a file named budget from the project directory you would enter dsmc archive t3 sys project budget It is unnecessary to enter the NetWare server name from which you are working Some commands have optional parameters If you do not enter a value for an optional parameter Tivoli Storage Manager uses the default value For example the restore command includes a required parameter sourcefilespec that specifies the path and file name in storage that you want to restore The optional parameter destinationfilespec specifies the path and file name where you want to place the restored files If you do not specify the destinationfilespec by default Tivoli Storage Manager restores the files to the original source path If you want to restore the files to a different directory enter a value for destinationfilespec For example to restore nwl sys project budget to nw2 sys newp
40. between 1 and 10 for the maximum number of sessions opened between the Tivoli Storage Manager server and client during processing Specifies the number of kilobytes Tivoli Storage Manager can buffer together in a transaction before sending data to the server Web Client Options The following are options for the Tivoli Storage Manager Web Client Table 25 Web Client Options Option Description Page httpport Specifies a TCP IP port address for the Web bd client managedservices Specifies whether the Tivoli Storage Manager hod Client Acceptor daemon manages the Web client the scheduler or both revokeremoteaccess Restricts administrator access on a client hod workstation through the Web client webports Enables the use of the Web client outside a had firewall by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor service and the Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI Using Options with Commands You can override some of the options in your options file by entering them with appropriate backup archive commands Options are processed in the following order precedence 1 Options defined on the server with server enforced client options The server overrides client values Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 75 Options entered locally on the command line Options defined on the server for a schedule using the options parameters Options entered lo
41. boxes next to the files or directories you want to archive 3 Enter a description accept the default description or select an existing description for your archive package in the Description pull down box 4 To modify specific archive options click the Override Archive Options button located to the right of the Estimate button Any options you change are effective during the current session only To estimate the transfer time for your archive selections click the Estimate button 5 Click the Archive button The Archive Status window displays the progress of the archive Considerations e Select File details on the View menu to display file attributes for any file e The following functions are not supported on the Web client Estimate View Policy Information Access Another User Searching and Filtering User Access List Preferences Editor Archiving Files Advanced Considerations This section discusses some advanced considerations for archiving files You do not need to use this information when performing basic archive tasks Deleting Archived Files You can delete archives if you decide you no longer need them Archives can be deleted if your node has archive delete authority default setting Unlike backup versions you can delete individual archives files or directories from archives without deleting the entire file space Use the delete archive command to delete archive copies Requesting Arc
42. class for a file or a group of files Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 149 Table 26 Client Command Options continued Command Option Description Commands Page deletefiles Deletes the local copy of files from archive Z your workstation after they are archived on the server description Specifies a description for a file that archive a you are archiving deleting or delete archive retrieving Also specifies the query archive description of a backupset that you query backupset want to query retrieve detail Displays management class attributes delete filespace for available management classes query mgmtclass query filespace dirsonly Backs up restores archives retrieves archive Ls or displays directories only incremental query archive query backup restore retrieve selective filelist Specifies a list of files to be processed archive ksd for the command Tivoli Storage delete archive Manager opens the designated filelist expire and processes the files listed within incremental according to the command query backup query archive restore retrieve selective filesonly Backs up restores retrieves or incremental fied displays files only query archive query backup restore retrieve selective fromdate Sets a date limit for files Tivoli query archive hell Storage Manager does not include files query backup processed before this date although restore older directories might be included retri
43. command for more information 48 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 6 Archiving and Retrieving Files Archiving and retrieving files is similar to backing up and restoring files Many of the concepts are similar In this chapter we cover the main archive and retrieve tasks but where concepts are the same as for backup and restore we provide references to Cha ack bo You Want id p or Arch amp for a discussion of the difference between backups and archives This chapter provides instructions for the following tasks Table 12 Archiving and Retrieving Files Task Page Understanding How Your Archives Are Managed When archiving files Tivoli Storage Manager checks the include options in your include exclude list to determine which management class to assign to the files If you do not specifically assign a management class to a file with an include option Tivoli Storage Manager assigns the file the default management class Tivoli Storage Manager can only archive a file if the selected management class contains an archive copy group Performing Command Line Backups You request archive services when you want to preserve copies of files in their current state either for later use or for historical or legal purposes You can archive a single file a group of files or all the files in a directory or subdirectory After you
44. console enter load tsands load tsa500 NetWare 5 or load tsa600 NetWare 6 Restore the entire NDS tree from Tivoli Storage Manager Use the following command at the NetWare server console load dsmc restore nds replace yes The replace yes option ensures that place holders created by the restore process are properly replaced by real NDS objects Restore the volume s using Tivoli Storage Manager Use the following NetWare console command for each volume you want to restore load dsmc restore sys subdir yes replace all volinfo Where SYS is the name of the failed volume Verify restoration of the NDS file data and trustee data Print Queues Backup and Recovery of Print Queues This section discusses how the backup and recovery procedures relate to print queues i e the physical directories and files relating to the NetWare printing environment The objects relating to the printing environment i e printer print queue and print server objects which are stored in the NDS are backed up and restored as part of the NDS backup and restore procedures in this chapter 240 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Print Queue File and Directory Entries The Print Queue The print queue proper is a directory entry where network print jobs reside until the actual printing This directory is named by the object id and has a QDR extension The directory entries are located
45. directory as dsmerror log Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt ERRORLOGName filespec gt lt Parameters filespec The fully qualified path and file name where you want to store error log information Ensure that all directories and subdirectories in the path exist and are accessible by client processing Tivoli Storage Manager will not create directories for you The default file name is dsmerror 1og it is placed in your current working directory Examples Options file errorlogname dmmock sys tmp tsmerror log Command line errorlog dmmock sys tmp tsmerror log This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 91 Errorlogretention The errorlogretention option specifies how many days to maintain error log entries before pruning and whether to save the pruned entries The error log is pruned when the first error is written to the log after a Tivoli Storage Manager session is started If the only session you run is the client scheduler and you run it twenty four hours a day the error log might not be pruned according to your expectations Stop the session and start it again to prune the error log when the next error is written Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax N D gt gt ERRORLOGRetention gt lt days S Paramet
46. drives available the restore for sys user brown can begin at the same time as the restore for sys user jones If your administrator is using collocation the number of sequential access media mounts required for restore operations is also reduced Other options you can choose to use in multiple restore commands are quiet The advantage of using this option is that messages are not printed to your screen and processing is faster The disadvantage is that you do not receive information about individual files that are processed Tivoli Storage Manager records only summary information errorlogname You can use this option to specify a different error log file for each restore command Be sure to keep track of which command goes with each log file Performing a Point in Time Restore A point in time restore recovers a file space or a directory to a previous condition For example a point in time restore can eliminate the effect of data corruption or recover a basic configuration to a prior condition You can start a point in time restore from the Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive command line client using the pitdate and pittime command line options A point in time restore is supported on the file space directory or file level 44 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Perform incremental backups to a Version 3 7 or higher server in order to support a point in time restore The s
47. dsme For example instead of typing dsmc archive to archive a file type only archive The first time you enter a command in an interactive session Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for your password if a password is required For example if you enter the following as the first command in your session incremental Tivoli Storage Manager responds Please enter password for node nwserver When you type your password and press Enter the password does not display on your screen You can also enter your password with the loop command dsmc loop password secret If Tivoli Storage Manager is unable to authenticate your ID and password you cannot use Tivoli Storage Manager services If Tivoli Storage Manager authenticates your ID and password it then asks you for your NetWare user ID Please enter NetWare user for nwserver Next you are prompted for your NetWare password Please enter the password on nwserver for NetWare user username After your NetWare ID and password are accepted Tivoli Storage Manager processes your command displays any messages it generates and returns to the dsmc gt prompt If you have specified nwpwfile yes in your client options file Tivoli Storage Manager saves your NetWare ID and password in a file in your installation directory with a PWD extension When you enter additional commands within the same interactive session Tivoli Storage Manager gets your NetWare ID and password from this f
48. exclude groups of files 10 to include or exclude groups of files 12 using 186 258 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Program Number 5698 ISE 5698 ISM 5697 ISE 5697 ISM Printed in the United States of America G on recycled paper containing 10 recovered post consumer fiber GC32 0786 00 Laseapy pmy saos pue uonepeysug yuo saryory dnypeg JOANI 5 uosa ITE ION IOF LOGEULTA IFLIOIG TJOATT ZUOLZEWUOJUL BULAS
49. file system the server does not update the date of the last full incremental In that case the next incremental by date backup will back up these files again Full Incremental versus Partial Incremental Incremental by date Backups Full incremental partial incremental and incremental by date all back up new and changed files An incremental by date takes less time to process than a full incremental and requires less memory A full incremental and an incremental by date backup may not place exactly the same backup files into server storage because the incremental by date backup e Does not expire backup versions of files that you delete from the NetWare server e Does not rebind backup versions to a new management class if you change the management class e Does not back up files with attributes that change unless the modification dates and times also change e Ignores the copy group frequency attribute of management classes Journal based backups also ignore this attribute e Does not handle name space changes on the volume Selective Backup Use a selective backup when you want to back up specific files or directories regardless of whether a current copy of those files exists on the server Incremental backups are generally part of an automated system to back up entire file systems In contrast selective backups allow you to manually select a set of files to backup regardless of whether they have changed since your last increm
50. general the return code is related to the highest severity message during the client operation e If the highest severity message is informational ANSnnnnl then the return code will be 0 e If the highest severity message is a warning ANSnnnnW then the return code will be 8 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 53 e If the highest severity message is an error ANSnnnnB then the return code will be 12 The exception to the above rules are warning or error messages that individual files could not be processed For such a skipped file the return code will be 4 For cases where the return code is not 0 you can examine the dsmerror log file and for scheduled events the dsmsched log file For a description of the return codes and their meanings see able 13 Table 13 Return Codes and Meanings Code Explanation 0 All operations completed successfully 4 The operation completed successfully but some files were not processed There were no other errors or warnings This return code is very common Files are not processed for various reasons The most common reasons are The file is in an exclude list e The file was in use by another application and could not be accessed by the client e The file changed during the operation to an extent prohibited by the copy serialization attribute See aliza 8 The operation completed with at least one warning message For scheduled events the status will be Completed
51. in the QUEUES directory on a volume chosen by the administrator DATA QUEUES 05000005 QDR The directory entries for the print queues are not recreated when you restore the NDS Therefore the directory entries must be restored from backup Hidden Print Queue Files There are two file types which are created in the print queue directories which are hidden system files a print server ID file and system print information file The print server ID file has a SRV extension and contains the IDs of print servers that are currently attached DATA QUEUES 05000004 QDR Q_0005 SYS The system print information file has a SYS extension and contains print job information and links to the current print job files DATA QUEUES 05000004 QDR Q_0005 SYS These files are always opened with an access of Deny Read Deny Write while the print server is active and therefore cannot be processed by Tivoli Storage Manager These files will be recreated after a restore when the print server driver e g PSERVER NLM is loaded We recommend that you exclude these files from Tivoli Storage Manager processing Queued Print Jobs Network print jobs which are queued to printers exists as files in the print queue directories with a Q extension DATA QUEUES 05000004 QDR 00050001 Q Print jobs which are actively being printed i e status Active are opened with an access of Deny Read Deny Write and therefore cannot be processed by Tivoli Storage Manag
52. interactive mode g J for options that you cannot use in interactive mode Syntax LOOP gt gt gt lt L options Parameters options For information about command line and common options that you can use Examples Task Start an interactive command line session Command dsmc loop At the tsm gt prompt enter a command There are three methods for ending an interactive session e Enter quit e Press the Escape key and then enter QQ e If other commands fail enter the following keystroke combination QQ 198 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Macro The macro command executes a series of commands that you specify in a macro file By including the macro command within a macro file you can nest as many as ten levels of commands Comment lines are not supported within the macro file that you specify for the macro command Syntax p gt gt MAcro macroname gt lt Parameters macroname Specifies the fully qualified name of the file containing the commands Examples The following is an example of how to use the macro command Task Selectively back up files in the following directories sys project proja sys project projb sys project projc Command macro sys tsm backabc mac where backabc mac contains the following statements sel sys devel project proja sel sys devel project projb sel sys devel project projc Cha
53. is excluded from backup To specify your own default management class for files that are not explicitly included specify include mgmt_class_name as the first include or exclude option defined Overriding the Management Class for Archived Files When you archive a file you can override the assigned management class using the archive command with the archmc option to specify a different management class For example to associate the file budget jan with the management class ret2yrs you would enter load dsmc archive sys plan projl budget jan archmc ret2yrs Selecting a Management Class for the NDS If you do not assign a management class to the NDS the default management class is used To assign a different management class to the NDS use the same criteria that you use when assigning management classes to files For example you would enter include nw5 nds mgmtclname where mgmtclname is the name of the management class If you plan to back up and archive the NDS select a management class with a backup copy group and an archive copy group The backup copy group in the management class must contain attributes that permit you to back up often and to keep as many different backup versions as you need To verify that complete copies of the files are created when you request a backup or archive select a management class that specifies static or shared static for serialization Selecting a Management Class
54. network and accessed by all servers The NDS is available in NetWare Version 4 0 and later versions NetWare Loadable Module NLM Novell NetWare software that provides extended server capability Support for various Tivoli Storage Manager and NetWare platforms are examples of NLMs network data transfer rate The data transfer rate calculated by dividing the total number of bytes transferred by the data transfer time For example the time spent transferring data over the network NLM NetWare Loadable Module node See client node node name A unique name used to identify a workstation file server or PC to the server Glossary 249 O open registration A registration process in which users can register their own workstations or PCs as client nodes with the server Contrast with closed registration options file A file that contains processing options e dsm opt Non UNIX Identifies Tivoli Storage Manager servers specifies communication methods defines scheduling options selects backup archive restore and retrieve options Also called the client options file UNIX Identifies the Tivoli Storage Manager server to contact specifies backup archive restore and retrieve options Also called the client users options file e dsm sys UNIX Contains stanzas describing Tivoli Storage Manager servers to contact for services These stanzas also specify communication methods backup and archive options and select sched
55. not support this option Syntax gt gt PITDate date gt lt Parameters date Specifies the appropriate date Enter the date in the format you selected with the dateformat option When you include dateformat with a command it must precede the fromdate pitdate and todate options Examples Command line dsmc restore sys test pitdate 08 01 2002 172 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Pittime Use the pittime option with the pitdate option to establish a point in time for which you want to display or restore the latest version of your backups Files that were backed up on or before the date and time you specify and which were not deleted before the date and time you specify are processed Backup versions that you create after this date and time are ignored This option is ignored if you do not specify pitdate option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt PITTime time gt lt Parameters time Specifies a time on a specified date If you do not specify a time the time defaults to 23 59 59 Specify the time in the format you selected with the timeformat option When you include the timeformat option in a command it must precede the fromtime pittime and totime options Examples Command line dsmc query backup sys test pitt 06 00 00 pitd 08 01 2002 Chapter 10 Using Options with Command
56. on the server or local files Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt LOCation Parameters server server gt lt file Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager searches for the backup set on the server This is the default file Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager searches for the backup set file s on a local file system Specify the file name in DOS NFS or FTAM format Examples Command line dsmc restore backupset mybackupsetname loc server 168 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Noprompt The noprompt option suppresses the confirmation prompt that normally appears before you delete an archived file or when performing an image restore operation Using this option can speed up the delete procedure However it also increases the danger of accidentally deleting an archived file that you want to save Use this option with caution Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt NOPrompt gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc delete archive sys test noprompt Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 169 Optfile The optfile option specifies the client options file you want to use when you start a Tivoli Storage Manager session Syntax gt gt OPTFILE file_name gt lt
57. pick Displays a list of files from which you delete archive kz can select files to delete restore or expire retrieve restore retrieve pitdate Specifies the file backup date to use query backup izd when you select files to restore Use restore with the pittime option pittime Specifies a point in time on the query backup iza specified date Use with the pitdate restore option This option is ignored if the pitdate option is absent preservepath Specifies how the restore directory restore iza path is built restore backupset retrieve todate Sets a date limit for files Tivoli query archive Ezd Storage Manager does not include files query backup that are processed after this date Use restore with the totime option retrieve totime Specifies an ending time on the query archive zg specified date Use with the todate query backup option This option is ignored if the restore todate option is absent retrieve v2archive Use this option with the archive archive zd command to archive only files and not directories to the server volinformation Backs up or restores volume archive ked restrictions such as volume or disk incremental space restrictions and trustee directory selective assignments for the root directory of a volume Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 151 Command Line Options Reference The following sections contain detailed information about each of the Tivoli Storage Manager command line options These opti
58. processing options e Scheduling options e Format and language options e Command processing options e Authorization options e Error processing options e Transaction processing option e Web client options Communication Options You use communication options to specify how your client node communicates with a Tivoli Storage Manager server For NetWare use the TCP IP communication protocol Use the commmethod option to specify the communication protocol For more information see Ask your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator for assistance in setting your communication options Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 69 TCP IP Options To use the TCP IP communication protocol you must include the tcpserveraddress option in your client options file The other TCP IP options have default values which you can modify only if you want to change the default value Table 15 TCP IP Options Option Description httpport tepbuffsize Specifies a TCP IP port address for the Tivoli Storage Manager Web client Specifies the size in kilobytes of the Tivoli Storage Manager internal TCP IP communication buffer tcpport Specifies the TCP IP port address for a Tivoli Storage Manager server tcpserveraddress Specifies the TCP IP address for a Tivoli Storage Manager server tcpwindowsize Specifies the size in kilobytes of the TCP IP sliding window for your client node webports Enables the
59. processing status Chapter 5 Restoring Your Data 45 Restoring Data from a Backup Set Your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator can generate a backup set a collection of your active files that reside on the server onto portable media created on a device using a format that is compatible with the client device It is possible to generate a backup set as a number of special files if the device class the Tivoli Storage Manager administrator is file These files can be stored locally on client to provide more restore flexibility for the client Portable media can be used on devices such as a CD ROM DVD and Iomega JAZ or ZIP drives Current device support information is available at the following Web site http www tivoli com support storage_mgr requirements html You can restore backup sets from the following locations e From portable media on a device attached to your client workstation e Directly from the server Backup sets can provide you with instant archive and rapid recovery capability as described below Instant Archive This capability allows an administrator to create an archive collection from backup versions already stored on the server Rapid Recovery When you are away from your office without a network connection and you lose data you can restore the data from the backup set Notes 1 If you cannot restore a backup set from portable media check with your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator to ensure tha
60. reports the file s size path file name total number of bytes transferred and whether the backup attempt was successful Similar statistics are produced by the selective and archive commands These also display in the dsmsched 1og file for scheduled commands If you have set the resourceutilization option Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to improve performance and load balancing by using multiple sessions when it backs up a volume or other set of files The command line displays similar information On the backup archive command line the name of each file displays after it is sent to the server The progress indicator shows overall progress Informational messages may display as follows e Directory gt Indicates the directory that you back up e Updating gt Indicates that only the file meta data is sent if file attributes change and not the data itself e Expiring gt Indicates an object file or directory on the server that no longer exists on the client is expired and made inactive on the server e Total number of objects inspected e Total number of objects backed up e Total number of objects updated These are files whose attributes such as file owner or file permissions have changed 36 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide e Total number of objects deleted This is a count of the objects deleted from the client workstation after being successfully backed up
61. rules to enter options with a command e Enter options before or after command parameters For example you can enter the subdir option before or after a file specification dsmc selective subdir yes sys usr home projl dsmc selective sys usr home projl subdir yes e When entering several options on a command separate each with a blank space e Enclose the value in quotes if the option value that you enter contains a blank space For example dsmc archive description Project A sys usr home projl e Any option that you enter on the command line with the exception of domain overrides the value set in the client options file When you use the domain option with the incremental command it adds to the domain specified in your client options file rather than overriding the current value e The maximum number of characters for a file name is 256 The maximum combined length of the file name and path name is 512 characters 76 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Client Options Reference The following sections contain detailed information about each of the Tivoli Storage Manager processing options Information for each option includes A description of the option A syntax diagram of the option The option name contains uppercase and lowercase characters The uppercase characters indicate the minimum abbreviation you can use for the option name See for an explana
62. separator For example if you wish to include the in a character class enter The escape character removes the usual meaning of as the close character class character This is also a server name delimiter when it is placed before a volume delimiter For example servername volumename directoryname file name The close character class character ends the enumeration of a character class The volume separator character separates a file specification The characters before the colon identify a volume name The characters after the colon identify either a directory name or a file name For example volumename directoryname file nam Chapter 2 Configuring IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 11 Examples Using Wildcards with Include and Exclude Patterns Tivoli Storage Manager accepts the exclude dir option which can be used to exclude directory entries However include and exclude dir cannot be used together For example the following statements will not produce the desired results exclude dir nds o adsm include nds o adsm ou tucson You must code the following statements to include only the objects in the o adsm ou tucson branch of the NDS exclude nds o adsm include nds o adsm ou tucson able A contains examples of ways you might use wildcard characters with include and exclude patterns Table 8 Using Wildcard Characters with Include and Exclude Patterns Task Pattern Excl
63. the server The process of setting up a node name and password is called registration and is performed by your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator There are two types of registration open and closed Your administrator chooses the type of registration for your site If you plan to use a Web client you must have an administrative user ID with system privilege policy privilege client access authority or client owner authority When a new node is registered an administrative user ID is automatically created for the node By default this node has client owner authority Using Closed Registration With closed registration an administrator must register your NetWare server as a client node with the server If your enterprise uses closed registration you need to provide the following information to your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator e Your node name the value returned by the hostname command or the node name you specified with the nodename option e The initial password you want to use if required e Contact information such as your name user ID and phone number In addition to possibly defining certain options in your options file your administrator defines the following for you e The policy domain to which your client node belongs A policy domain contains policy sets and management classes defined by your administrator that control how Tivoli Storage Manager manages the files you back up and archive e Whether y
64. the reason could be any of the following e The server is not at the correct level e The client is not at the correct level Removing a Name Space You can use the NetWare Volume Repair Utility vrepair nlm to remove a name space For more information refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media 34 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Running an Incremental Backup on a Memory Constrained Machine The performance of an incremental backup suffers if your machine runs out of available memory during the backup If you have enough memory on your machine you can use a more efficient method of backing up your machine Turn off the memoryefficientbackup option in the options file memoryefficientbackup no Specifying memoryefficientbackup yes the default causes Tivoli Storage Manager to back up only one directory at a time If you have poor performance even when using memoryefficientbackup yes check your communication buffer settings and the communication link between your machine and the server Using the Include Exclude List to Control Processing Usually there are files on your disk that you do not want to back up These files might be operating system or application files that could be easily recovered by reinstalling the program or any other file that you could easily rebuild You can use the include and exclude options in the options file to specify
65. the server before the commrestartduration value elapses even if the event s startup window has elapsed You can use the commrestartduration option and the commrestartinterval in busy or unstable network environments to decrease connection failures Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt COMMRESTARTDuration minutes gt lt Parameters minutes The maximum number of minutes you want the client to attempt to reconnect with a server after a communication failure occurs The range of values is zero through 9999 the default is 60 Examples Options file commrestartduration 90 Command line Does not apply 80 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Commrestartinterval The commrestartinterval option specifies the number of seconds you want the client to wait between attempts to reconnect with a server after a communication error occurs Note Use this option only when commrestartduration is a value greater than zero You can use the commrestartduration option and the commrestartinterval in busy or unstable network environments to decrease connection failures Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt COMMRESTARTInterval seconds gt Parameters seconds The number of seconds you want the client to wait between attempts to reconnect with a server after a communicati
66. those files will not appear in a subsequent query from the GUI However these files will display on the command line if you specify the proper query with a wildcard character for the directory Syntax gt gt EXPire 7 filespec gt lt options Parameters options You can use these command line options with the expire command pick and ilelist For more information about command line options see Note If the user specifies filelist then pick is ignored filespec Specifies a path and a filename that you want to expire You can enter only one file specification on this command However you can use wildcards to select a group of files or all the files in a directory If you specify the filelist option the filespec designation is ignored Examples Task Inactivate the letter1 txt file in the sys ann directory Command dsmc expire sys ann letter1 txt Task Inactivate all files in the admin mydir directory Command dsmc expire sys admin mydir 192 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Help The help command displays a Table of Contents of help topics for the command line client Enter the number of the topic that you want to view If there is more than one screen of topics scroll backward or forward through the list To exit type q and press Enter Syntax gt gt Help gt lt parioa Parameters options For information about comm
67. to disable the scheduling of commands by the server Commands are scheduled by using the action command option on the define schedule server command The schedcmddisabled option does not disable the preschedulecmd and postschedulecmd commands However you can specify preschedulecmd or postschedulecmd_with a blank or a null string to disable the scheduling of these commands See Z for more information Chapter 7 Automating Tasks 57 58 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies Storage management policies are rules your administrator defines in order to manage your backups and archives on the server You can associate or bind your data to these policies then when the data is backed up or archived it is managed according to policy criteria Policy criteria include a policy domain a policy set a copy group and a management class Policies determine e Whether a file is eligible for backup or archive services e How many backup versions to keep e How long to keep inactive backup versions and archive copies e Where to place the copies in storage This chapter explains e Policy criteria policy domains policy sets copy groups and management classes e How to display policies e How Tivoli Storage Manager associates your data with policies Using Policy Domains and Policy Sets A policy domain is a group of cl
68. to the server The count is zero for all backup commands e Total number of objects expired See for more information e Total number of objects failed Objects can fail for several reasons Check the dsmerror log for details e Data transfer time The total time to transfer data across the network Transfer statistics may not match the file statistics if the operation was retried due to a communications failure or session loss The transfer statistics display the bytes attempted to be transferred across all command attempts e Network data transfer rate The average rate at which the network transfers data between the client and the server This is calculated by dividing the total number of bytes transferred by the time to transfer the data over the network The time it takes to process objects is not included in the network transfer rate Therefore the network transfer rate is higher than the aggregate transfer rate e Aggregate data transfer rate The average rate at which Tivoli Storage Manager and the network transfer data between the client and the server This is calculated by dividing the total number of bytes transferred by the time that elapses from the beginning to the end of the process Both Tivoli Storage Manager processing and network time are included in the aggregate transfer rate Therefore the aggregate transfer rate is lower than the network transfer rate Note On occasion the aggregate data transfer rate may be hi
69. use of the Web client outside a firewall by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the Client Acceptor service and the Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI Node Option Use the following options to specify the client node for which to request backup archive services Table 16 Node Options Option Description Page nodename Specifies the name of your workstation so that you can establish communications with the Tivoli Storage Manager server virtualnodename Specifies the name of another client node Use this option if you want to restore or retrieve your files from a Tivoli Storage Manager server to a client node other than the one on which you stored files without storing your password in the registry Backup and Archive Processing Options You can use the following options to control some aspects of backup and archive processing Table 17 Backup and Archive Processing Options Option Description Page changingretries Specifies the number of retries when attempting to back up or archive a file that is in use 8 compressalways Specifies whether to continue compressing an object if it grows during compression or resend the object uncompressed This option is used with the compression option 70 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Table 17 Backup and Archive Processing Options continued
70. valid in interactive mode 106 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Numberformat The numberformat option specifies the format you want to use to display numbers Use this option if you want to change the default number format for the language of the message repository you are using Note This numberformat option does not affect the Web client The Web client uses the number format for the locale that the browser is running in If the browser is not running in a supported locale the Web client uses the number format for American English Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt NUMberformat number gt lt Parameters number Displays numbers using any one of the following formats Specify the number 1 6 that corresponds to the number format you want to use 1 1 000 00 This is the default 2 1 000 00 3 1 000 00 4 1000 00 5 1 000 00 6 1000 00 Examples Options file num 4 Command line number format 4 This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 107 Nwignorecompressbit The nwignorecompressbit option specifies whether you want to ignore the setting of the compressed file Co attribute during selection processing for incremental backups This option is valid only on NetWare clients sending an incremental backup on a NetWare 4 file system O
71. which files to exclude from backup processing Tivoli Storage Manager backs up any file that is not explicitly excluded You do not need to use an include option to include specific files unless those files are in a directory you are trying to exclude For more information on setting up an include exclude list see Creating arl Performing Command Line Backups Running a Full Incremental Backup To run a full incremental backup use the incremental command Tivoli Storage Manager runs an incremental backup on the volumes you specify in your client domain using the domain option The volumes you specify can include the NDS option You can specify the volumes you want to back up in any of the following ways e To run a full incremental backup of your client domain enter the following command load dsmc incremental If you do not set the domain option in your client options file dsm opt Tivoli Storage Manager backs up all locally mounted volumes and the NDS e You can use the domain option with the incremental command to back up other volumes in addition to the volumes you specify in your default client domain For example if you enter the following in your client options file domain sys data nds and the following on the command line load dsmc incremental domain usr Tivoli Storage Manager performs an incremental backup for your sys data and usr volumes and the NDS Chapter 4 Backing Up Your Data 35 e Y
72. you are prompted whether to overwrite it This is the default All All existing files are overwritten including read only files If access to a file is denied you are prompted to skip or overwrite the file No action is taken on the file until there is a response to the prompt Yes Any existing files are overwritten except read only files If a file is read only you are prompted to overwrite the file or skip it No action is taken on the file until there is a response to the prompt If access to a file is denied the file is skipped No Existing files are not overwritten No prompts will display Examples Options file replace all Command line replace no 122 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Resourceutilization Use the resourceutilization option in your client options file dsm opt to regulate the level of resources the Tivoli Storage Manager server and client can use during processing Regulating Backup and Archive Sessions When you request a backup or archive the client can use more than one session to the server The default is to use a maximum of two sessions one to query the server and one to send file data The client can use only one server session if you specify a resourceutilization setting of 1 A client can use more than the default number of sessions when connecting to a server that is Version 3 7 or higher For example resourceutil
73. your objects Specify in the command whether you are giving access to archives or backups Note You cannot give access to both archives and backups using a single command Access is enabled only between like platforms You can grant access only to another NetWare client node Parameters Archive Permits access to archived files Backup Permits access to backup versions of files filespec Specifies the path file or directory to which you are giving access to another node or user Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all files in a directory all objects in a directory branch or all objects in a volume Use a single asterisk for the file spec to give access to all files owned by you and backed up on the server When the command set access backup node user is entered no check is made with the server it is assumed you have at least one object backed up If you give access to a branch of the current working directory you only need to specify the branch If you give access to objects that are not in a branch of the current working directory you must specify the complete path The file spec to which you gave access must have at least one backup version or archive copy object file or directory on the server To give access to all objects below a certain level use an asterisk directory delimiter and an asterisk at the end of your file spec For example to give access to all objects below s
74. 1 is the default port number Your administrator can set a different port number using the httpport option See on page 94 for more information You can also access the Web client workstation through the Web administrative GUI Tivoli Storage Manager Firewall Support In most cases the Tivoli Storage Manager server and clients can work across a firewall The ports that the client and server need to communicate must be opened in the firewall by the firewall administrator Because every firewall is different the firewall administrator may need to consult the instructions for the firewall software or hardware in use The ports that the firewall needs to define are those ports that are needed for the client to connect to the Tivoli Storage Manager server If the server is listening on port 1500 then the firewall software needs to forward the port to the Tivoli Storage Manager server machine To allow clients to communicate with a server across a firewall you must open the TCP IP port for the server using the tcpport option in the server options file The default TCP IP port is 1500 To allow the Web client to communicate with remote workstations across a firewall you must open the HTTP port for the remote workstation using the httpport option in the remote workstation s client option file The default HTTP port is 1581 You must open the two TCP IP ports for the remote workstation client using the webports option in the remote workstati
75. 10 Using Options with Commands 177 Totime Use the totime option with the todate option to specify an ending time on a specified date For example you might request a list of files that were backed up before 11 59 PM on June 30 2002 Tivoli Storage Manager ignores this option if you do not specify the todate option Use the totime and todate options with the fromtime and fromdate options to request a list of files that were backed up within a period of time For example you might request a list of files that were backed up between 6 00 AM on July 1 2002 and 11 59 PM on July 30 2002 Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt T0Time time gt lt Parameters time Specifies an ending time If you do not specify a time the time defaults to 23 59 59 Specify the time in the format you selected with the timeformat option When you include the timeformat option in a command it must precede the fromtime pittime and totime options Examples Command line dsmc restore sys test totime 23 00 00 todate 09 17 2002 178 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide V2archive Use the v2archive option with the archive command to archive only files to the server Tivoli Storage Manager will not process directories that exist in the path of the source file specification Note Do not use the v2archive option when archiving the NDS
76. 117 postschedulecmd 117 prenschedulecmd 118 preschedulecmd 118 processorutilization 119 queryschedperiod 120 quiet 121 replace 122 resourceutilization 123 retryperiod 125 revokeremoteaccess 126 schedcmddisabled 127 schedlogname 128 schedlogretention 129 schedmode 130 scrolllines 132 scrollprompt 133 setting ina file 6 subdir 134 tapeprompt 136 tcpbuffsize 137 tcpclientaddress 138 tcpclientport 139 tcpport 140 tcpserveraddress 141 tcpwindowsize 142 timeformat 143 txnbytelimit 144 using with commands 75 verbose 145 virtualnodename 146 webports 147 client options file creating and modifying 5 required options for 5 specifying include exclude options 8 client scheduler connecting to server schedule 55 displaying completed work 56 displaying scheduled work 55 scheduled command 55 client scheduler continued starting 55 220 client system options httpport 96 schedmode 130 scrolllines 132 client server communications establishing 5 closed registration permissions 7 using 7 command line displaying processing status 36 ending a session 25 overriding managment class during archive 65 starting a session 18 command line interface return codes from 53 command name 183 command parameters optional 184 required 184 command processing summary of options 73 command rules 186 commands archive 187 batch mode 182 cancel restore 188 delete access 189 delete archive 190 delete filespace 191 expire 192 help 193 increme
77. 8 exclude file backup 8 processing 12 to exclude system files 10 wildcard characters 10 12 exclude options exclude archive 93 exclude backup 93 exclude compression 93 exclude dir 93 exclude encrypt 93 exclude file 93 exclude file backup 93 exclude encrypt 93 excluding files system files 10 using wildcard characters 12 wildcard characters 10 executables return codes from 53 expire command 192 F file archive using Web client 50 details displaying 38 51 retrieve using Web client 52 file space delete 191 file spaces deleting 48 file specification number permitted on commands 184 file specification syntax maximum file specifications in command 184 specifying 184 filelist option 158 files archived overriding management class 65 archiving 187 backing up changed 28 backing up long names 28 backing up new 28 backing up when open 38 binding management classes to 66 definition of changed 29 delete archived 51 encryption 27 excluding groups how managed 40 including groups 10 12 maximum file size for operations 185 processing include exclude 12 restoring another node s 47 to another NetWare server 47 retrieve 51 retrieving another node s 47 archived files 51 to another NetWare server 47 sorting list 24 filesonly option 160 firewall establishing communications through 23 96 140 specifying TCP IP ports for the Web client 147 using Web client through 147 format and language summary of options 73 fromd
78. 97 Include Options The include options specify one of the following e Objects within a broad group of excluded objects that you want to include for backup and archive services e Files within a broad group of excluded files that you want to include for encryption processing e Files within a broad group of excluded files that you want to include for compression processing e Objects to which you want to assign a specific management class and a management class name e A management class to assign to all objects to which you do not explicitly assign a management class If you do not assign a specific management class to objects Tivoli Storage Manager uses the default management class in the active policy set of your policy domain Notes 1 The exclude dir statements override all include statements that match the pattern 2 The server can also define these options with the inclexcl option Compression Processing If you want to include specific files or groups of files for compression processing during a backup or archive operation consider the following e You must set the compression option to yes to enable compression processing If you do not specify the compression option or you set the compression option to no Tivoli Storage Manager does not perform compression processing See for more information Note The client will not compress files that the NetWare operating system already compresses If you set the compre
79. Area Network LAN A variable sized communications network placed in one location LAN connects servers PCs workstations a network operating system access methods and communications software and links logical unit number LUN A logical unit number LUN is a unique identifier used on a SCSI bus that enables it to differentiate between up to eight separate devices each of which is a logical unit Each LUN is a unique number that identifies a specific logical unit which may be a hard disk tape drive or other device which understands the SCSI protocol management class A policy object that is a named collection of copy groups A management class is associated with a file to specify how the server should manage backup versions or archive copies of workstation files See binding and copy group mode A copy group attribute that specifies whether a backup file should be created for a file that was not modified since the last time the file was backed up See absolute and modified modified A backup copy group attribute indicating a file is considered for backup only if the file has been changed since the last backup A file is considered changed if the date size owner or permissions have changed See absolute and mode N NDS NetWare Directory Services NetWare Directory Services NDS A database used by Novell NetWare to organize resources for an entire network of NetWare servers The database itself can be distributed across the
80. Client Acceptor daemon can manage the scheduler reducing the number of background processes on your workstation This also resolves memory retention problems that may occur when using manual methods of running the scheduler We strongly recommend that you use the Client Acceptor daemon to manage the Client Scheduler Do not use the Client Acceptor daemon while the schedule command is in use Use the managedservices option in your client options file to specify whether the Client Acceptor daemon manages the scheduler See for more information Configuring the CAD to Manage the Scheduler Perform the following steps to configure the CAD to manage the client scheduler 1 Install the Web client See more information 2 Edit the dsm opt file and add this option managedservices schedule webclient If you do not want to run the Web client specify managedservices schedule 3 Start the Client Acceptor See for more information Starting the Client Scheduler To start the client scheduler on your client node and connect to the server schedule change to the Tivoli Storage Manager installation directory and enter the following command load dsmc schedule When you start the client scheduler it runs continuously until you end the process log off your system or enter this command at the NetWare console prompt unload dsmc You can also include the schedule command in your autoexec ncf file so that every time you start Net
81. Conventions for NDS Objects Tivoli Storage Manager Version 4 and above store NDS object names as the typeful distinguished object name including Root For example the object CN Spike OU Development O TSM backed up from server GOETHE would have the following Tivoli Storage Manager name Root CN SPIKE OU DEVELOPMENT O TSM Note Tivoli Storage Manager stores all NDS names on the server in upper case to allow mixed case searches Tivoli Storage Manager preserves the case of NDS objects during a restore or retrieve operation NDS Backup Using Tivoli Storage Manager Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5 1 and above use a file space name of NDS when backing up the NDS As a result please consider the following e You cannot backup or archive a NetWare volume named NDS We recommend that you do not use NDS as a NetWare volume name e When using the Tivoli Storage Manager for the first time you should back up the NDS e If you need to restore a version of the NDS that was backed up by a Tivoli Storage Manager Version 3 client you must use the Tivoli Storage Manager client version used to back up the NDS Specifying the Entire NDS for Backup Any server on which the TSANDS NLM module is loaded can back up the NDS The module TSANDS NLM is not server centric You can load this module on any server containing an NDS partition If the module TSANDS NLM is loaded on a different server than DSMC NLM the former server must be expli
82. Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 xi Table 1 Typographical Conventions continued Example Description dateformat Boldface italic type indicates a Tivoli Storage Manager option The bold type is used to introduce the option or used in an example All other times in the text it appears as regular type Occasionally file names are entered in boldface italic for emphasis filespec Italicized type indicates either the name of a parameter a new term or a placeholder for information that you provide Italics are also used for emphasis in the text maxcmdretries Monospaced type represents fragments of a program or information as it would display on a screen plus sign A plus sign between two keys indicates you should press both keys at the same time Reading Syntax Diagrams This section describes how to read the syntax diagrams used in this manual To read a syntax diagram follow the path of the line Read from left to right and top to bottom e The symbol indicates the beginning of a syntax diagram e The gt symbol at the end of a line indicates the syntax diagram continues on the next line e The symbol at the beginning of a line indicates a syntax diagram continues from the previous line e The gt 4 symbol indicates the end of a syntax diagram Syntax items such as a keyword or variable can be e On the line required element e Above the line default element e Below the l
83. D9 Displaying Information about Scheduled Work S p9 Displaying Information about Completed Work 56 Enabling Disabling Scheduled Commands 57 Chapter 8 Understanding papas Management Policies 59 Using Policy Domains and Policy Sets 59 Using Management Classes and Copy Groups 59 Displaying Information about Management Classes and Copy Groups gt 60 Copy Group Name 61 Copy Types s z osor 4 pog a s d 26L Copy Frequency s s ao so s o e 61 Versions Data Exists 2 22 2222 61 Versions Data Deleted 62 Retain Extra Versions 62 Retain Only Version 62 Copy Serialization 62 Copy Mode 2 op amp amp 2 amp 2 63 Copy Destination 63 Retain Versions e bole oe 1 163 Selecting a Management Class fot Files oe p b8 Assigning a Management Class to Files 64 Overriding the Management Class for Archived Files gt i09 Selecting a Management Class iot the NDS poa a69 Selecting a Management Class for Directories 65 Binding and Rebinding Management Classes to Files 66 Rebinding Backup Versions of Files 66 Using a Retention Grace Period 67 Chapter 9 Using Processing eons 69 Overview of Processing Options 69 Communication Options 69 TCP IP Options
84. For NetWare directory services volinformation handles the root container and NDS schema Specify volinformation either with the selective or the archive command or any incremental command that does not target the entire volume Entering the incremental command on an entire volume implicitly backs up the root level information Syntax gt gt VOLinformation gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc selective sys system nlm vol The following examples send root level information to the server dsmc dsmc dsmc dsmc dsmc dsmc dsmc dsmc sel sys vol arch sys vol incr sys system vol incr sys implied sel dir vol arch dir vol incr dir o adsm vol incr dir implied The following commands send root level information from the server dsmc dsmc dsmc dsmc restore sys sub yes retrieve sys sub yes restore dir sub yes retrieve dir sub yes 180 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 11 Using Commands Tivoli Storage Manager provides a command line interface CLI that you can use as an alternative to the graphical user interface GUI This chapter describes how to start or end a client command session and how to enter commands It also provides detailed information about each command fable 27 shows a list of tasks related to entering commands Table 27 Enter
85. L1 Frank Ramke Debbie Ramke Krista Breeden 02 05 1999 06 29 49 STANDARD A VOL1 Frank Ramke Debbie Ramke Shane Breeden 11 02 05 1999 06 29 49 DEFAULT A VOL1 Frank Ramke 1 Long File 11 02 05 1999 06 29 49 DEFAULT A VOL1 Frank Ramke 2 Long File 11 02 05 1999 06 29 49 DEFAULT A VOL1 Frank Ramke Debbie Ramke 1 Long File 11 02 05 1999 06 29 49 DEFAULT A VOL1 Frank Ramke Debbie Ramke 2 Long File 11 02 03 1999 06 29 49 DEFAULT I VOL1 FRANK RAMKE DEBBIE RAMKE 2 LONG FILE tsm lt D The last file in the list is an inactive file and is not cased properly because of the way case is preserved by the client This migration cannot case inactive files correctly During a full incremental objects are updated This is when renaming occurs For example Chapter 4 Backing Up Your Data 33 Updating gt VOL1 TOMRAMKO DEBBIERA SHANEBRE Sent Updating gt 11 VOL1 TOMRAMKO DEBBIERA 1LONGFIL Sent Updating gt 11 VOL1 TOMRAMKO DEBBIERA 2LONGFIO Sent Updating gt 11 VOL1 VONORE 1LONGFIL Sent Updating gt 11 VOL1 VONORETE 1LONGFIL Sent Successful incremental backup of VOL1 Converting Name Spaces Using the Web Client or Command Line To convert from a short to a long name space you must perform a full incremental on your file space You can perform the conversion using either the Web client or the command line To use the Web client click on the volume name and select Incremental complete from the pull
86. M include nds 0 TSM QU Tucson You must use the following statements to include only the objects in the O TSM OU Tucson branch of the NDS Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare Backup and Recovery Guide 229 exclude nds 0 TSM include nds 0 TSM QU Tucson User Rights Required to Backup or Restore NDS SMS currently requires that you possess supervisory object rights to the highest level of container during a backup or restore operation For the entire NDS tree this implies that you possess supervisory object rights to Root Conventions for Logging into a NetWare Server When logging into a NetWare server from Tivoli Storage Manager you must use one of the following e A typeful full distinguished name e A typeless full distinguished name e A bindery emulation name used in proper context For example if you receive the following message Please enter NetWare user for ELLAS You can specify one of the following e The typeful full distinguished name CN Admin 0 TSM e The typeless full distinguished name Admin TSM e The bindery emulation name used in proper context Admin if the Context is set to 0 TSM Note You do not need to specify the context The context does not affect Tivoli Storage Manager NDS processing The Tivoli Storage Manager login to the NetWare server follows the same protocol as other logins to the NetWare server NetWare will not allow Tivoli Storage Manager to login to the NetWare serve
87. NTERNAL NET number if you wish to recover the server object properly You can find this information in the failed server s autoexec ncf file which is restored with the server specific information see point above Follow the NetWare installation instructions until you are prompted to install NDS 3 Restore the NDS server object from the backup copy When prompted for the directory tree in which you want to install the server follow these steps e Press F5 to Restore NDS e Press F3 to specify the path to restore the DS backup file SERVDATA NDS e Specify the path where the server specific information was restored In the previous example the path is server b sys system server a After restoring the server object back into the NDS you can proceed to restore the rest of the operating system from backup you will not need to copy the rest of the files normally copied during the install process Please refer to ENDS Restord a age 235 for more information about restoring the NetWare servers and NDS in their entireties NDS Specific Backup Issues 232 Before realizing an NDS recovery solution it is necessary to understand NDS concepts as they relate to the backup procedure This section introduces NDS concepts in the context of the backup procedure Partitions Partition boundary information is not backed up by SMS We recommend that you make a blueprint of the NDS tree structure to accommodate the recovery after the loss o
88. NWCONFIG NLM utility to reinstall the Tivoli Storage Manager code 236 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide 9 on the NetWare server Reconfigure the communications protocol so that the Tivoli Storage Manager client can communicate with the Tivoli Storage Manager server Load the necessary SMS target service agents At the target NetWare server console type load tsands load tsa500 NetWare 5 or load tsa600 NetWare 6 Restore the entire NDS tree from Tivoli Storage Manager Use the following command at the NetWare server console load dsmc restore directory replace yes The replace yes option is required to ensure that place holders created by the restore process are properly replaced by real NDS objects Restore the volume s using Tivoli Storage Manager Use the following NetWare console command for each volume you want to restore load dsmc restore sys subdir yes replace all volinfo Where sys is the name of the failed volume Verify restoration of the NDS file data and trustee data Example 2b Multiple Server Network replica present You can use this example in a situation in which the SYS volume or entire server is lost but replicas of all partitions which were present on the failed server exist on other servers You can also use this example when a failed SYS volume or entire server contains no NDS replications In this example you must restore NDS obj
89. NetWare server administrator supervisor or user with administrator or supervisor equivalence you can maintain backup versions of your NetWare server files that you can restore if the original files are damaged or lost You can also archive NetWare server files that you do not currently need or preserve them in their current state and retrieve them when necessary You can access IBM Tivoli Storage Manager backup and archive features e Locally through the native client command line interface e Remotely or locally through the Web client interface This chapter provides migration environment and installation information for the Tivoli Storage Manager client After installation see Chapte d for required configuration tasks to perform before using Tivoli Storage Manager Migrating from Earlier Versions Upgrade Path for Clients and Servers As part of a migration plan from Tivoli Storage Manager Version 4 2 to Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5 1 Tivoli Storage Manager clients and servers may be upgraded at different times To help ensure that you can continue your backup and archive activities during the migration note the following e A Tivoli Storage Manager V4 2 client can perform backup restore archive and retrieve functions to a Tivoli Storage Manager V5 1 server e A Tivoli Storage Manager V5 1 client can perform backup restore archive retrieve and query functions to a Tivoli Storage Manager 4 2 server e Data tha
90. P port address for 140 servers backup archive services for remote 39 service and technical support 25 session information displaying 209 set access command 223 set password command 225 shared dynamic serialization 62 78 shared static serialization 62 78 show menu 45 sorting files 24 standard management class copy destination 63 copy frequency 61 copy group name 61 copy mode absolute 63 modified 63 copy serialization 62 copy type 61 default values 60 retain extra versions 62 retain only version 62 retain versions 63 standard management class continued versions data deleted active versions 62 inactive versions 62 versions data exists 61 standard policy domain 59 starting Web client 20 starting a session batch mode 18 interactive mode 19 starting Tivoli Storage Manager automatically overview 3 static serialization 62 static shared serialization 62 storage displaying files 201 202 displaying restartable restore sessions 207 storage management policies 59 copy groups 59 default management class 59 include exclude list 60 management classes 59 policy domains default 59 standard 59 policy sets active policy set 59 storage management services 2 subdir option 134 summary of changes for version 5 1 xvii Swing enabled browser necessary to run Web client 20 tapeprompt option 136 TCP IP communication method options 70 tcpbuffsize option 137 tcpclientaddress option 138 tcpclientport option 139 tcpport option 140
91. Review dsmerror log and dsmsched log for scheduled events to determine what warning messages were issued and to assess their impact on the operation 12 The operation completed with at least one error message except for error messages for skipped files For scheduled events the status will be Failed Review dsmerror log and dsmsched log for scheduled events to determine what error messages were issued and to assess their impact on the operation As a general rule this return code means that the error was severe enough to prevent the successful completion of the operation For example an error that prevents an entire drive from being processed yields return code 12 When a file is not found the operation yields return code 12 The return code for a client macro will be the highest return code issued among the individual commands that comprise the macro For example suppose a macro consists of these commands SELECTIVE C MyTools SUBDIR YES INCREMENTAL C MyPrograms TestODBCDriver SUBDIR YES ARCHIVE E TSM510C SUBDIR YES If the first command completes with return code 0 the second command completes with return code 8 and the third command completes with return code 4 the return code for the macro will be 8 54 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Managing the Client Scheduler Using the Client Acceptor Daemon Recommended Method The Tivoli Storage Manager
92. Storage Manager does not check those attributes for selective backup e Do the copy groups specify either static or shared static for serialization If serialization is shared dynamic or dynamic you might get fuzzy backups or archive copies Verify that this is acceptable For example you might want to use shared dynamic or dynamic serialization for a file to which log records are continuously added If you used static or shared static serialization the file might never back up because it is constantly in use With shared dynamic or dynamic serialization the file is backed up but the backup version of the file might contain a truncated message Do not use shared dynamic or dynamic serialization for a file if it is very important that the backup version or archive copy contain all changes e Does the backup copy group specify an adequate number of backup versions to keep along with an adequate length of time to keep them e Does the archive copy group specify an adequate length of time to keep archived copies of files Assigning a Management Class to Files A management class defines when your files are included in a backup how long they are kept on the server and how many versions of the file the server should keep The server administrator selects a default management class You can specify your own management class to override the default management class You can assign a management class for a file or file group by using an inc
93. This parameter is required when you restore a file name from the current path when you do not specify a relative or absolute path and when the file name conflicts with one of the reserved restore command keywords such as restore backupset See Ma a 2 85 for the maximum file size for restore processing options You can use these command line options with the restore command dirsonly filelist filesonly fromdate fromnode fromtime ifnewer inactive latest pick pitdate pittime preservepath todate totime For more information see common options sourcefilespec Specifies the path and file name in storage that you want to restore Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all the files in a directory DIRectory or NDS Restores the NDS To restore the entire directory enter 214 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide restore dir sub yes To restore one container enter dir o container_name In all examples you may enter nds instead of dir Note Objects added after the backup version was created are not deleted destinationfilespec Specifies the path and file name where you want to place the retrieved files The path and file name must follow DOS naming conventions If you do not specify a destination Tivoli Storage Manager restores the files to the original source path Examples Task Task Task Task Task Task Task Tas
94. Ware the client scheduler starts Tape prompting does not occur during a scheduled event regardless of the tapeprompt option setting in your options file It is strongly recommended that you use the Client Acceptor daemon to manage the Client Scheduler Do not use the Client Acceptor daemon while the schedule Displaying Information about Scheduled Work To view schedules that are defined for your client node enter load dsmc query schedule Chapter 7 Automating Tasks 55 Tivoli Storage Manager displays detailed information about all scheduled work for your client node The figure below displays sample query schedule output Schedule Name DAILY_INC Description Daily System wide backup Action Incremental Options QUIET Objects Priority 1 Next Execution 30 minutes Duration 4 Hours Period 1 Day Day of Week Any Expire Never Schedule Name WEEKLY_INC Description Weekly backup for project files Action Incremental Options QUIET Objects NDS NDS Priority 1 Next Execution 60 minutes Duration 8 Hours Period 7 Days Day of Week Friday Expire Never Figure 1 Sample Query Schedule Output The schedule name DAILY_INC starts a daily incremental backup The next incremental backup will start in 30 minutes Because no objects are listed Tivoli Storage Manager runs the incremental backup on your default domain The schedule has no expiration date The schedule name WEEKLY_INC starts a weekly incremental bac
95. Web backup archive client Hardware Requirements e A personal computer or workstation running as a NetWare file server e Disk space see the README file that is shipped on the product installation media e Memory approximately 1 MB of RAM is needed for each 8 000 files per volume Software Requirements e Novell NetWare 5 1 or Novell NetWare 6 See the README file that is shipped on the product installation media for information on supported patches from Novell Communications Methods To use this communication Install this software To connect to these Tivoli Storage Manager method on file server servers TCP IP TCP IP Standard AIX HP UX OS 390 Solaris VM Windows with Novell NetWare NT z OS SMS Software Requirements For current information on supported Storage Management Services SMS modules available from Novell refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media Notes 1 If you want to execute remote backups SMDR NLM must be loaded on the source and target servers and the TSA modules must be loaded on the target server 2 Only NetWare 5 1 and 6 0 are supported for remote backup 2 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Installing the Client Program Required The Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare client is included on the desktop client installation CD ROM in the tsmcli ntw directory structure However you must have Create access t
96. Web client displays in the language associated with the locale of the browser If the browser is running in a locale that Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the Web client displays in American English Options File Place this option in the dsm opt file Syntax gt gt LANGuage language gt lt Parameters language Specifies the language you want to use Examples Options file language ameng Command line Does not apply 100 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Largecommbuffers The largecommbuffers option specifies whether the client uses increased buffers to transfer large amounts of data between the client and the server You can disable this option when your workstation is running low on memory Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No gt gt LARGECOMmbuf fers Pa L Yes Parameters No Specifies that increased buffers are not used to transfer large amounts of data to the server This is the default Yes Specifies that increased buffers are used to transfer large amounts of data to the server Examples Options file largecommbuffers yes Command line largecommbuf fers yes This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 101 Managedservices The managedservices option specifies whether th
97. a free port number agentport Specifies the required Tivoli Storage Manager Web client agent service port number If a value is not specified the default zero 0 causes TCP IP to randomly assign a free port number Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 147 Examples Options file webports 2123 2124 Command line webports 2123 2124 148 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands The client program includes a group of client command options that you can enter with specific commands only from the command line You can also enter common options to override many of the options set in your client options file dsm opt Options are processed following this precedence order 1 Options defined on the server with server enforced client options The client cannot override the value Options entered locally on the command line Options defined on the server for a schedule using the options parameters Options entered locally in the options file Options received from the server with client options not enforced by the server The client can override the value 6 Default option values akon For a complete list of client command options their descriptions the commands with which you can use them and the location in this book for more information see La Entering Options with a Command Follow these general rules when you enter op
98. abase The list contains these fields owner replace subdir preservepath source and destination Certain restore operations called restartable restore sessions start a special protocol within Tivoli Storage Manager Some restore sessions can be restarted for these reasons e Restartable restore sessions that fail because of network outage client failure server outage or similar problem can be restarted from the point where they failed Use the restart restore command to restart a restore session e Restartable restore sessions lock the file space so that files cannot be moved off sequential volumes query restore displays the restartable restore sessions and their associated file space Use the cancel restore command to cancel a restartable restore session Syntax gt gt Query Restore gt lt Parameters options For information_about common options you can use with the query restore command see K Examples Task Display your restartable restore session in the server database Command query restore Chapter 11 Using Commands 207 Query Schedule The query schedule command displays the events scheduled for your node Your administrator can set up schedules to perform automatic backups and archives for you To plan your work use this command to determine when the next scheduled events occur Syntax gt gt Query SCHedule gt lt sitions Parameters options You can use the dateformat comm
99. aces the dsm smp file in SYS tivoli tsm client ba or in another location you select during installation To create and customize your own client options file 1 From a NetWare requestor change your current directory to the Tivoli Storage Manager installation directory 2 Copy the dsm smp file to dsm opt by entering copy dsm smp dsm opt 3 Start the NetWare text editor using the load edit command Use the NetWare load edit command with caution because loss of data can occur This text editor is normally used to modify small text files Do not edit large files with this utility Or you can use an editor from the NetWare requester machine 4 Modify the required options according to your needs The following options are required to establish communication with a Tivoli Storage Manager server Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 5 NODename ABNERYOUNG COMMmethod TCPIP TCPPort 1520 TCPServeraddress node domain company com You can also specify the following types of options in your dsm opt file e Backup and archive processing options e Restore and retrieve processing options e Scheduling options e Format and language options e Command processing options e Authorization options e Error processing options e Transaction processing option e Web client options about these options You may use some options only with commands For more information about these options see Setting Options in the Client Options F
100. aitonerror LNo _ Parameters Yes gt lt Specifies that the client program displays an error message if it encounters an error Press Enter to return to the NetWare console This is the default No Specifies that the client program returns immediately to the NetWare console if it encounters an error while exiting An error message is not displayed Examples Options file nww yes Command line Does not apply 112 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Password The password option specifies a Tivoli Storage Manager password If you do not specify this option and your administrator has set authentication to On you are prompted for a password when you start a Tivoli Storage Manager session Notes 1 If the server prompts for a password the password does not display as you enter it However if you use the password option on the command line your password will display as you enter it 2 If the Tivoli Storage Manager server name changes or Tivoli Storage Manager clients are directed to a different Tivoli Storage Manager server all clients will need to have a new password initialized for the new server name The password option is ignored when the passwordaccess option is set to generate Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt PASsword password gt lt Parameters password Specifies a 1 to
101. al Task Runa full incremental backup for the sys volume the data volume on server b9 Command dsmc i b9 sys b9 data b9 bind Task Runa partial incremental backup Command dsmc inc vol system Task Runa partial incremental backup by date using the incrbydate option Command dsmc inc incrbydate 196 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Task Task Task Incrementally back up the NDS Command dsmc inc nds Run an incremental backup remotely for the sys volume on server b9 Command dsmc inc b9 sys Run a partial incremental backup of the NDS Command dsmc inc nds o ann Chapter 11 Using Commands 197 Loop The loop command starts an interactive command line session that is maintained until you enter quit In an interactive command line session it is unnecessary to precede each command name with dsmc and your password if one is required After you start an interactive session most of the options you enter with other commands are in effect throughout the session unless you enter them again using a different setting You can enter all valid commands in interactive mode except the schedule and loop commands There are some options that you cannot use in the interactive session created by the loop command and are identified in the option description by this statement This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in
102. alization Contrast with dynamic shared dynamic and static share point A drive or directory on Windows NT 2000 Me XP or Windows Net whose files are available for shared access across a network The share point name is part of a UNC name See Universal Naming Convention UNC name shift click Click on an item while pressing the Shift key space management The process of keeping sufficient free storage space available on a local file system for new data and making the most efficient and economical use of distributed storage resources snapshot An image backup type A snapshot is a point in time view of a volume When you perform an online image backup the Logical Volume Snapshot Agent LVSA takes a snapshot of the volume Any changes that occur to the volume after the snapshot begins are not included in the backup stabilized file space A file space that exists on the server but not on the client This situation can arise in at least two instances 1 A drive is removed from a client workstation 2 A file space is renamed on the server Stabilized file spaces remain on the server until deleted by the user or administrator Files and directories can be restored and retrieved from a stabilized file space However it is not possible to back up or archive data to a stabilized file space static A copy group serialization value specifying that a file must not be modified during a backup or archive operation If the file is in use du
103. aluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products except those expressly designated by Tivoli Systems or IBM are the responsibility of the user Tivoli Systems or IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A For license inquiries regarding double byte DBCS information contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries in writing to IBM World Trade Asia Corporation Licensing 2 31 Roppongi 3 chome Minato ku Tokyo 106 Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be in
104. always enforced and placed at the bottom of the include exclude list and evaluated before the client include exclude statements If the client options file include exclude list contains one or more inclexcl options that specify include exclude files the include exclude statements in these files are placed in the list position occupied by the inclexcl option and processed accordingly 12 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide When performing an incremental backup Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates all exclude dir statements first and removes the excluded directories and files from the Note Because directory branches excluded using the exclude dir option do not display in the GUI setting this option prevents you from performing either selective or incremental backups of data in the excluded directories from the GUI After evaluating all exclude dir statements Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates the include exclude list from the bottom up and stops when it finds an include or exclude statement that matches the file it is processing The order in which the include and exclude options are entered therefore affects which files are included and excluded See Cha g g a 4 for more information about the order in which all options are processed To display a list of all include exclude statements in effect on your client workstation in the actual order they are processed use the query inclexcl co
105. anager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt DELetefiles gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc archive small testdir deletefiles 154 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Description The description option assigns or specifies a description for files when performing archive delete retrieve or query archive operations For example if you want to archive a file named budget jan and assign to it the description 2002 Budget for Proj 1 you would enter dsmc archive des 2002 Budget for Proj 1 t3 sys plan projl budget jan You can also use this option to specify the description of a backup set that you want to query Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt DEScription description gt lt Parameters description Assigns a description to the file you are archiving If you do not specify a description the default is archive date x where x is the current system date If you use the archive command to archive more than one file the description you enter applies to each file For example to archive a group of files and assign the same description Project X to each file you would enter dsmc archive description Project x t3 sys allproj x You can then use the description to retrieve all of the files Examples Command line
106. and description and location See Cha g bage 14d for information about these command line options scrolllines and scrollprompt See Cha g for information about these common options backupsetname Specifies the name of the backup set on the server you want to query when location server is in effect You can use wildcards to specify the backup set name If you do not specify a backup set name all backup sets display filename Specifies the file name on your local workstation that contains the backup set you want to query when location file is in effect Examples Task Query a backup set on the server called mybackupsetname on the server Command dsmc query backupset mybackupsetname loc server Task Query the backup set in the backupsetfile name file in the budget directory Command dsmc query backupset sys u budget backupsetfile name loc file Chapter 11 Using Commands 203 Query Filespace The query filespace command displays a list of file spaces for a node stored on the server A file space is a logical space on the server that contains files you backed up or archived Tivoli Storage Manager assigns a separate file space on the server for each node at your workstation from which you back up or archive files Syntax gt gt Query Filespace T gt lt options Parameters options You can use the fromnode detail command line options with the files with the query filespace command See ees f
107. and TSA600 NLM or TSANDS NLM and SMDR NLM on the remote server When requesting Tivoli Storage Manager services specify the remote NetWare server name and volume at the beginning of any directory file or path name you want to operate on When you try to contact a remote NetWare server you are Pompe for an ID and a password if one of the following occurs You do not specify the nwuser option e You initially start a Tivoli Storage Manager session and are prompted for your client node ID and password e You initially connect to another NetWare server e Your supervisor password or passwords expire e Your Tivoli Storage Manager client node password has changed Chapter 2 Configuring IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 15 16 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 3 Getting Started This chapter includes instructions for the following tasks Task Page Btarting a Sessionl g Using Batch Model E id bal bal bal bal Tivoli Storage Manager Client Authentication When using the native backup archive GUI or command line clients or the Web client you can logon using a nodename and password or administrative user ID and password Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for your user ID and compares it to the configured nodename If they match Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to authenticate the user ID as a nodename If the authentication fails or if the user ID d
108. and Web client 102 use to manage Web client 102 client command options 183 archme 153 deletefiles 154 description 155 detail 156 dirsonly 157 filelist 158 filesonly 160 fromdate 161 fromnode 162 fromtime 163 ifnewer 164 inactive 165 incrbydate 166 latest 167 noprompt 169 overriding the client options file 149 pick 171 pittime 173 preservepath 174 todate 177 totime 178 using options with commands 149 v2archive 179 volinformation 180 client commands overriding client options file 75 client components NetWare client 2 client message language type 100 client options 183 changingretries 78 commmethod 79 commrestartduration 80 commrestartinterval 81 compressalways 82 compression 83 dateformat 85 dirmc 86 domain 87 editor 89 errorlogname 91 errorlogretention 92 exclude exclude archive 8 93 exclude backup 8 93 exclude compression 8 93 exclude dir 8 93 exclude encrypt 93 exclude file 8 93 exclude file backup 8 93 httpport 96 253 client options continued inclexcl 97 include 98 include archive 98 include backup 98 include compression 98 include encrypt 98 include file 98 language 100 largecommbuffers 101 location 168 managedservices 102 maxcmdretries 104 memoryefficientbackup 105 nodename 106 numberformat 107 nwignorecompressbit 108 nwpwiile 109 nwuser 110 nwwaitonerror 112 optfile 170 overriding using command line 75 password 113 passwordaccess 114 passworddir 116 pitdate 172 postnschedulecmd
109. archive a file you can choose to erase the original file In addition Tivoli Storage Manager stores trustee directory rights trustee file assignments file attributes name spaces and associated name space information with the archive copies of the files Use the archive command to archive files Use wildcards to archive more than one file at a time If you archive a directory of files you can use the subdir yes option to include all the subdirectories under that directory in the archive Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 49 For example to archive the files in the sys proj directory and its subdirectories use load dsmc archive sys proj subdir yes You can use more than one file specification with the archive command For example to archive the sys proj h1 doc file and the sys h2 doc file use load dsmc archive sys proj hl doc sys h2 doc Use the description option to assign a description to the archive load dsmc archive sys hl doc description Chapter 1 first version a 6 for an explanation of the statistics that Tivoli Storage Manager provides after processing an incremental selective or archive command Use the archmc option to specify a different management class than the one normally associated with the file Using the V2 Archive Option The v2archive option can be used with the archive command to archive only files to the server Directories that exist in the path of the source file specification are not p
110. ate option 161 fromnode option 47 162 fromtime option 163 full incremental comparing performance with incremental by date 31 description 29 overview 28 when to use 31 fuzzy backup 63 10 12 G graphical user interface displaying processing status 36 graphical user interface continued enabling local backup set 46 GUI overriding managment class during archive 65 H hardware requirements NetWare client 2 help displaying online 25 online forum 25 service and technical support 25 help command 193 httpport option 96 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager introducing 1 id saving a NetWare 19 ifnewer option 164 inactive files displaying 24 202 inactive option 165 inactive version 45 defined 42 inclexcl option 97 include option management class 64 processing 12 wildcard characters include options include 98 include archive 98 include backup 98 include compression 98 include encrypt 98 include file 98 include exclude list backup used during 35 creating 8 query order of processing 205 include exclude options file specifying path and file name of 97 Unicode enabled file spaces 97 incrbydate option 166 incremental backup by date 36 description 29 full 35 new and changed files 29 of directories restrictions 30 overview 28 process 29 types 28 using Web client GUI 37 incremental by date using Web client GUI 37 incremental command 194 incremental by date comparing performance with inc
111. ation information may also be needed to access various online services available on the Web site The Tivoli Customer Support Web site http www tivoli com support offers a guide to support services the Customer Support Handbook frequently asked questions FAQs and technical information including release notes user s guides redbooks and white papers You can access Tivoli publications online at http www tivoli com support documents The documentation for some products is available in PDF and HTML formats Translated documents are also available for some products To access most of the documentation you need an ID and a password To obtain an ID for use on the support Web site go to http www tivoli com support getting You can order documentation by e mail at swdist tivoli com Please provide the publication number part number or order number of the desired document Alternatively you can provide the document title version number and date of publication We are very interested in hearing about your experience with Tivoli products and documentation We also welcome your suggestions for improvements If you have comments or suggestions about our documentation please contact us in one of the following ways e Send e mail to pubs tivoli com e Complete our customer feedback survey at http www tivoli com support survey 26 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Gui
112. ation on the restore command and do not specify any of the options inactive latest pick fromdate or todate the client uses a different method for retrieving files and directories from the server This method is called no query restore because instead of querying the server for each object to be restored a single restore request is sent to the server This request results in files and directories being returned directly from the server without further action by the client The client merely accepts the data coming from the server and restores it to the destination named on the restore command An example of an unrestricted wildcard command would be servera one dev An example of a restricted wildcard command would be servera one dev bak When the client uses this method the restore session is treated differently If the restore process is interrupted for any reason such as a power outage or network failure the server records the point at which the restore was interrupted This record is known to the client as a restartable restore It is possible to create more than one restartable restore session Use the query restore command to find out if your client has any restartable restore sessions in the server database The existence of a restartable restore inhibits further backups of that file system until the restartable restore is completed If you attempt to repeat the restore that was interrupted or try to back up the destination file
113. ay on your screen You can also enter your password with the command For example to issue the incremental command with your password in batch mode enter the following dsmc incremental password secret where secret is your password If Tivoli Storage Manager is unable to authenticate your ID and password you are returned to the NetWare colon prompt without being able to use Tivoli Storage Manager services If Tivoli Storage Manager authenticates your ID and password it asks you for your NetWare user ID Please enter NetWare user for nwserver Next Tivoli Storage Manager requests your NetWare password Please enter the password on nwserver for NetWare user username After your NetWare ID and password are accepted the command processes displays any messages it generates and returns to the NetWare colon prompt 18 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Using Interactive Mode Use interactive mode when you want to issue a series of commands Because Tivoli Storage Manager establishes the connection to the server only once for interactive mode you can process a series of commands more quickly in interactive mode than in batch mode To start a client command session in interactive mode enter the dsmc or dsmc loop command dsmc dsmc loop When you press Enter this prompt displays on your screen tsm gt When you are in interactive mode do not precede commands with
114. ay online help by entering the Help command A menu of topics is displayed for which help is available See for more information about the Help command On the Web client e Select the Help menu e Click the Help button in current window Ending a Session In batch mode each dsmc command you enter is a complete session Tivoli Storage Manager ends the session when it finishes processing the command To end an interactive session enter quit at the dsmc gt prompt To end a Web client session open a different URL or close the browser Online Forum To participate in online user discussions of Tivoli Storage Manager you can subscribe to an Internet Listserv forum This is not officially supported by Tivoli Storage Manager but support people do participate in the discussions along with other users You can subscribe by sending a note to Listserv vm marist edu that contains subscribe adsm 1 yourfirstname yourlastname Posts can then be sent to adsm l1 vm marist edu Other Sources of Online Help An anonymous FTP server is available where you can find PTF maintenance and other Tivoli Storage Manager related materials Four other anonymous servers are unofficially maintained by non IBM volunteers These servers are ftp software ibm com storage primary IBM ftp rz uni karlsruhe de mirror Germany ftp wu wien ac at mirror Austria ftp cac psu edu mirror Pennsylvania sunsite unc edu pub packages mirror
115. bdir See Cha information about these common options backupsetname Specifies the name of the backup set on the server from which to perform a restore operation You cannot use wildcard characters to specify the backup set name Tivoli Storage Manager restores the backup set from the server via LAN filename Specifies the name of a local file from which to perform a restore operation sourcefilespec Specifies the source path which can be a portion of the backup set The default is to restore the entire backup set destinationfilespec Specifies the destination path for the restored files If you do not specify a sourcefilespec you cannot specify a destinationfilespec If you do not specify a destination Tivoli Storage Manager restores the files to the original source path If you are restoring more than one file you must end the specification with a directory delimiter otherwise Tivoli Storage Manager assumes the last name is a file name and reports an error If you are restoring a single file you can optionally end the specification with a file name if you want to give the restored file a new name Examples Task Restore a backup set called mybackupsetname from the server Command dsmc restore backupset mybackupsetname loc server Task Restore the backup set contained in the backupsetfile name file in the budget directory Command dsmc restore backupset sys u budget backupsetfile name location file Chapter 11 Using Co
116. below the sys dirl directory dsmc set access sys dirl e The maximum number of characters for a file name is 256 The maximum number of characters for a path name is 512 characters 184 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide e The maximum number of file specifications per command The Query commands can accept only one file specification The restore and retrieve commands can accept a sourcefilespec and a destinationfilespec The archive delete archive incremental and selective commands will accept up to 20 file specifications Separate file specifications with a blank space Note You can overcome these limitations by using the filelist option to process a list of files The Tivoli Storage Manager client opens the file you specify with this option and_processes the list of files within according to the specific command See for more information Maximum File Size for Operations The maximum file size for backup restore archive and retrieve operations is 4 294 963 200 4GB 4KB Netware 5 x and Netware 6 clients support a maximum file size greater than 4 GB on NSS volumes and the ability to backup or restore directory space limitations Remembering Previous Commands If you set the editor option to yes in your client options file dsm opt Tivoli Storage Manager permits you to recall and edit as many as 20 previously entered commands by using the Up arrow and
117. cally in the options file Options received from the server with client options not enforced by the server The server does not override client values 6 Default option values GE Tivoli Storage Manager also includes a group of client command options that you can enter only on the command line with specific commands For a complete list of command line options a description and where to go in this book for more information see k To use an option with a command enter a dash the option name an equal sign and the option parameters For example dsmc incremental domain sys For options that do not include parameters enter a dash and the option name For example dsmc incremental quiet Note Use a leading dash to indicate that the following text is the name of an option If an object name begins with a dash you must surround it in either single quotes or double quotes Most operating system command line processors strip the quotes before submitting the command line arguments to the Tivoli Storage Manager client application In such cases using escape characters or doubling the quotes allows the client to receive the quoted object name In loop mode surround such objects in either single quotes or double quotes You can enter the entire option name or its abbreviation For information about how to read the syntax diagrams see Entering Options with a Command Follow these general
118. can be replaced by Tivoli Storage Manager backup data during the NetWare installation process by restoring the server specific information resource via Tivoli Storage Manager Ensure that the server specific information is being backed up on regular basis The server specific information will be backed up on NetWare 5 1 and 6 1 servers as part of the incremental backup process if you specify the all local domain in the client options file dsm opt If you specify the all local domain the incremental process always backs up server specific information first before the SYS volume You can also explicitly specify server specific information in the domain statement as follows domain all local implicit domain serverspecificinfo explicit You can also selectively backup the server specific information as follows load dsmc selective serverspecificinfo You can verify that the server specific information is backed up by querying the node s file spaces from the admin or backup client There should be a file space called servername SERVERSPECIFICINFO associated with the node To restore a server which has failed with server specific information available 1 After the server failure restore the server specific information to another server so that it can be used during the server installation process For example you have two NetWare servers SERVER A and SERVER B SERVER A experiences a failure and must be restored Restore the server speci
119. chive copy groups in the standard management class Each attribute is discussed in more 60 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide detail immediately following the table Table 14 Default Values in the Standard Management Class Attribute Backup Default Archive Default Copy group name Standard Standard Copy type Backup Archive Copy frequency 0 days CMD Command Versions data exists Two versions Does not apply Versions data deleted One version Does not apply Retain extra versions 30 days Does not apply Retain only version 60 days Does not apply Copy serialization Shared static Shared static Copy mode Modified Absolute Copy destination Backuppool Archivepool Retain versions Does not apply 365 days Copy Group Name The name of the copy group The default value for both backup and archive is Standard Copy Type The type of copy group The value for backup is always Backup and the value for archive is always Archive Copy Frequency Copy frequency is the minimum number of days that must elapse between successive incremental backups Use this attribute during a full incremental backup Copy frequency works with the mode parameter For example if frequency is zero 0 and mode is modified a file or directory is backed up only if it changed since the last incremental backup If frequency is zero 0 and mode is absolute a file is backed up every ti
120. cify which volumes to process e When your administrator defines a schedule to run an incremental backup for you but does not specify which volumes to process If you do not use the domain option to specify volumes in your client options file Tivoli Storage Manager uses the all local parameter as the default When you use the domain option with the incremental command Tivoli Storage Manager adds volumes that you specify to the volumes defined in your client options file For example if you enter the following in your client options file domain sys data NDS and the following on the command line dsmc incremental domain usr Tivoli Storage Manager performs an incremental backup for your sys data and usr volumes If you use both a file specification and the domain option with the incremental command Tivoli Storage Manager ignores the domain option and processes only those volumes that you specify in the file specification Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax aiid gt gt DOMain gt lt domain DIRectory or NDS Parameters all local Backs up all local volumes This is the default The NDS is not included in the all local domain To include the NDS add the directory to the domain entry Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 87 88 domain Defines the volumes to include in your default client domain When you use domain with the increme
121. citly specified For example if you load TSANDS NLM on server GOETHE you can load DSMC NLM on a different server and backup the NDS using the following command load dsmc incremental goethe directory Note The NDS is not included in all local domain you must explicitly code NDS in the domain option or use one of the following backup commands to back up the NDS e To back up the entire NDS enter the following load dsmc selective nds subdir yes volinfo e To archive the entire NDS enter the following load dsmc archive nds subdir yes volinfo e To perform an incremental backup of the entire NDS enter the following 228 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide load dsmc incremental nds or load dsmc incremental nds The incremental command will always process the Root and Schema objects Specifying NDS Objects for Backup Restore and Queries The following examples show how to specify NDS objects for backup archive restore retrieve and query operations e Specifying entire NDS tree selective nds subdir yes e Specifying all objects in a container e g organizational unit restore nds o tsm subdir no e Specifying all objects in a container and all sub containers retrieve nds o tsm subdir yes e Specifying all objects containing the string spike in the object name query backup nds spike subdir yes e Specifying the root object Schema and high level o
122. contact the server or to process a scheduled command that fails The range of values is 1 through 9999 the default is 20 Examples Options file retryp 10 Command line retryperiod 10 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 125 Revokeremoteaccess The revokeremoteaccess option restricts an administrator with client access privilege from accessing a client workstation that is running the Web client This option does not restrict administrators with client owner system or policy privilege from accessing your workstation through the Web client Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax None r gt n voKErenoteaccess f fp Ion Access Parameters None Does not revoke access to administrators who have client access authority for the client This is the default Access Revokes access to administrators who have client access authority for the client Examples Options file revokeremoteaccess none Command line Does not apply 126 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Schedcmddisabled The schedcmddisabled option specifies whether to disable the scheduling of commands by the server action command option on the define schedule server command This opti
123. corporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 243 IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling i the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs including this one and ii the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged should contact IBM Corporation Information Enabling Requests Dept M13 5600 Cottle Road San Jose CA 95193 0001 U S A Such information may be available subject to appropriate terms and conditions including in some cases payment of a fee The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us Information concerning non IBM products was obtain
124. d because of a disaster you must restore the entire NDS tree and all file information To do this perform the following steps 1 8 Reinstall the NetWare OS and NDS on a primary server Use the NWCOMFIG NLM utility for this step By default this server will hold the Root partition of the NDS tree Install the remaining servers into the network using the NWCONFIG NLM utility After this step you should have a skeleton of your original NDS Ensure that you note the following precautions e Use the same servers name in the install e Use the same admin parent container and password as the last NDS backup e Ensure all hard disk partitions are at least as large as they were on the failed server e Use the same volume names as on the failed servers e Place the servers in the same context as the original tree Ensure that the NetWare OS has the correct patches for Tivoli Storage Manager to function properly Refer to the client readme 1st file shipped with the Tivoli Storage Manager client for more information about dependencies on NetWare OS patches Install Tivoli Storage Manager and reestablish the communications protocol Use the NWCONFIG NLM utility to reinstall the Tivoli Storage Manager code on the NetWare server Reconfigure the communications protocol so that the Tivoli Storage Manager client can communicate with the Tivoli Storage Manager server Load the necessary SMS target service agents At the target NetWare server
125. d by a recognized naming authority often via block assignment to a manufacturer that identifies a connection or a set of connections to the network Abbreviated WWN A WWN is assigned for the life of a connection device Most networking technologies e g Ethernet FDDI etc use a world wide name convention 252 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Index A absolute mode 63 access deleting 189 for other nodes 47 querying 200 active files displaying 24 202 active version 45 defined 42 archive allocated memory required for processing UNIX restrictions 31 binding management classes to files 66 command 187 copy mode 63 deleting 190 grace period retention 60 how managed 59 maximum file size 185 overriding managment class during 65 purpose 28 sorting file list 24 using the Web client 20 using Web client GUI 50 archive copy group 60 attributes 60 archived files advanced considerations 51 archive command using 49 deleting archived files 51 display 201 overview 49 summary of options 70 archme option 153 authorization summary of options 74 authorization rule deleting 189 querying 200 authorized user definition xi autoexec ncf file updating 5 automating backup archive services central scheduling 53 using client scheduler 53 backing up incremental backup processing 29 summary of options 70 backing up files active version 42 45 full incremental backup 35 i
126. d format If you set the encryptkey option to save you are only prompted the first time you perform an operation Thereafter Tivoli Storage Manager does not prompt for the password Note The Web client saves the encryption key password in the TSM PWD file If you do not save the encryption key password you are prompted for the initial encryption key password when you begin encryption processing Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt dsm opt Syntax Save j gt gt ENCryptkey E gt lt prompt Parameters save Specifies that you want to save the encryption key password to a local TSM PWD file If you set the encryptkey option to save you are only prompted the first time you perform an operation Thereafter Tivoli Storage Manager does not prompt for the password This is the default prompt Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for the password for each backup archive and restore operation Examples Options file encryptkey prompt Command line encryptkey prompt 90 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Errorlogname The errorlogname option specifies the fully qualified path and file name of the file where you want to store information about errors that occur during processing The value for this option overrides the DSM_LOG or DSM_DIR environment variables The dsmwebcl log and dsmsched 1og files will be created in the same
127. d from Tivoli Storage Manager storage after the number of days specified with the migfileexpiration option have elapsed F file server A dedicated computer and its peripheral storage devices connected to a local area network that stores both programs and files shared by users on the network file space A logical space on the Tivoli Storage Manager server that contains a group of files In Tivoli Storage Manager users can restore retrieve or delete file spaces from Tivoli Storage Manager storage A file space for systems e Windows file spaces for removable media are identified by volume label Fixed drive file spaces are identified by Universal Naming Convention UNC name e UNIX Logical space that contains a group of files backed up or archived from the same file system or part of a file system defined with the virtualmountpoint option in the client system options file frequency A copy group attribute that specifies the minimum interval in days between incremental backups fuzzy backup A backup version of a file that might not accurately reflect what is currently in the file because the file was backed up at the same time as it was being modified fuzzy copy An archive copy of a file that might not accurately reflect what is currently in the file because Tivoli Storage Manager archived the file while the file was being modified G generate password Processing that stores a new password in an encrypted password file w
128. d from the NetWare server e It does not rebind backup versions to a new management class if the management class has changed e It does not back up files with attributes that have changed unless the modification dates and times have also changed such as Access control list ACL data e It ignores the copy group frequency attribute of management classes e It does not handle name space changes on the volume Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt INCRbydate gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc incremental incrbydate 166 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Latest Use the latest option with the restore command to restore the most recent backup version of a file even if the backup is inactive Only active versions are considered for a restore unless you use either the inactive or the latest option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt LATest gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc restore latest sys u devel projecta Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 167 Location The location option specifies where Tivoli Storage Manager searches for the backup set for a query or restore operation You can use this option to locate backup sets
129. d user connections For example if you have a five user NetWare server Tivoli Storage Manager uses connection numbers 6 and 7 Sorting File Lists On the Web client you can sort a list of files by various attributes such as name directory size or modification date Sorting files by the last backup date can be useful in determining what date and time to use for the point in time function see To sort a file list select one of the Sort by items from the View menu bar You can also click the appropriate column heading in the File List box The Show active inactive files menu option controls whether to display both active and inactive backup versions of files An active file is the most recent backup version of a file that existed on your workstation when you ran your last backup All other backup versions of that file are called inactive Only active backup versions of files display during a session unless you select the Show active inactive files menu option If you delete the file from your workstation the active version becomes inactive the next time you run an incremental backup On the command line client you can use the inactive and pick options_with que and restore commands to display both active and inactive objects See Hnactive od bage 144 and Pick on page 171 for more information 24 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Displaying Online Help You can displ
130. de Chapter 4 Backing Up Your Data A primary function of Tivoli Storage Manager is to create and maintain a set of backup versions of the files on your NetWare server This allows you to recover older versions of your files if the current files are lost or damaged This chapter covers different ways to back up files and how to restore these files when you need them As a quick reference this chapter provides instructions for the following tasks Table 9 Backing Up Your Data Task Page A Checklist to Help Plan Your Backups If you are a first time user or if you only back up files occasionally you may wish to use able 1d as a checklist of preliminary steps to consider before performing a backup Table 10 Preliminary Steps for Backing Up Files Decide whether you want to backup files or archive them See 9 for more information Determine whether you need support for files with long names See Support fod ee for more information Create an include exclude list to specify files and directories you want to exclude from backup services See g for more information amin d d bage 34 for more information Encryption You can encrypt the data that is sent to the server during a backup or archive operation using standard DES 56 bit encryption Use the include encrypt and exclude encrypt options to select files for encryption processing By default the client does n
131. de each command with the executable program name dsmc Alternatively you can enter dsmc loop on the command line to start a client command session in interactive mode Loop is the default command for dsmc If a password is required Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you when you enter the first command Type your password and press Enter You can also enter your password using the password option with the loop command but your password is displayed For example if your password is secret you would enter dsmc loop password secret To end an interactive session enter quit at the prompt Entering Client Commands A client command can include one or more of these components e Command name e Options e Parameters The sections that follow describe each of these components Command Name The first part of a command is the command name The command name consists of a single word such as help or schedule or an action word and an object for that action such as query archive Enter the full command name or its minimum abbreviation For example you can enter any of the following versions of the query schedule command query schedule q sc q sched query sc Options There are two groups of options that you can use with commands e Client options The group of options that are set in your client options file dsm opt To override an option in the client options file enter the option with a command For detailed information
132. deletes the management class from your active policy set The default management class is used to manage the backup versions when you back up the file again e Your administrator assigns your client node to a different policy domain and the active policy set in that domain does not have a management class with the same name The default management class for the new policy domain is used to manage the backup versions 66 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Using a Retention Grace Period Tivoli Storage Manager also provides a backup retention grace period and an archive retention grace period to help protect your backup and archive data when it is unable to rebind a file to an appropriate management class The backup retention grace period is used when e You change the management class for a file but neither the default management class nor the new management class contain a backup copy group e The management class to which a file is bound no longer exists and the default management class does not contain a backup copy group The backup retention grace period defined in your policy domain starts when you run an incremental backup The default is 30 days However your administrator can lengthen or shorten this period When Tivoli Storage Manager manages a file using the backup retention grace period it does not create any new backup versions of the file All existing backup vers
133. der hardcopies of all our publications from the IBM Direct Publications Catalog Web site at the following Web page http www elink ibmlink ibm com pb1 pb About This Book XV xvi Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Summary of Changes for Tivoli Storage Manager This section summarizes changes made to the Tivoli Storage Manager product and this publication Technical Changes for Version 5 1 April 2002 Following is a summary of changes since Tivoli Storage Manager Version 4 2 Enhanced Web Client Interface The Web client interface is enhanced to support a JRE 1 3 1 Swing enabled browser The Web client facilitates the use of assistive devices for users with disabilities and contains improved keyboard navigation Support for Long File Names for Backup Sets Tivoli Storage Manager supports the use of long file names for backup sets on the NetWare client See 68 for more information Support for Long File Name Conversions Tivoli Storage Manager supports long file name conversions without being affected by the memoryefficientbackup option See Names on page id for more information Support for files greater than 4 GB on Novell Storage Services NSS Volumes Tivoli Storage Manager supports files larger than 4 GB for NSS file spaces on NetWare 5 1 and NetWare 6 See for more information Multiple Session No Query Restore The backup archive clients can now utilize m
134. down menu at the top of the screen To perform a full incremental on your file space from the command line enter dsmc i sys After converting the file space the client backs up or archives subsequent files to a long name space If the Long Name conversion has started you must let it run to completion If the conversion from a short name space to a long name space is interrupted and then restarted you must use a 4 2 1 or higher Tivoli Storage Manager server You may receive an error message if conversion is attempted with a lower level server Backing Up Before Conversion If you run a selective backup or archive before conversion Tivoli Storage Manager uses the current name space for the backup that is the name space indicated from the query filespace command You must change your Include exclude statements to reflect the long names Until conversion is complete consider entering both long and short names Long names with spaces must be enclosed in double quotes For example exclude voll frankraO exclude voll frank ramke If files have been backed up from a volume with long name space loaded and you attempt to restore them to a volume without long name space the restore will fail A message similar to the following displays 02 12 1999 09 24 30 TSA400 4 14 287 The name space type does not exist or is invalid Use quotes to enclose a long name string that has embedded blanks If files are not being converted
135. dsmc restore sys doc hl doc To restore the file under a new name and directory use load dsmc restore sys doc hl doc sys newdoc h2 doc Add the subdir yes option to the command if you need to restore the files in a directory and all of its subdirectories For example if you are recovering an entire volume in this example the nw3 volume you can restore all the files using load dsmc restore nw3 subdir yes See for more information Performing Large Restore Operations If you need to restore a large number of files you can improve performance by issuing multiple restore commands at one time You can use multiple restore sessions to improve performance In this case you can start several restore sessions simultaneously See Respurneutilization on for more information For example to restore all the files in your sys user file space you could enter load dsmc restore sys user subdir yes replace all tapeprompt no However if you issue multiple commands for directories in your sys user file space Tivoli Storage Manager can restore the files faster For example you could issue these commands load dsmc res sys user jones subdir yes rep all tapep no load dsmc res sys user smith subdir yes rep all tapep no load dsmc res sys user brown subdir yes rep all tapep no Chapter 5 Restoring Your Data 43 Or if you need to restore multiple volumes you could issue a restore command for each volume For examp
136. e default days Specifies the number of days to keep log file entries before pruning The range of values is zero through 9999 Dors Specifies whether to save the pruned entries Use a space or comma to separate this parameter from the previous one D Discards the log entries when pruning the log This is the default S Saves the log entries when pruning the log Pruned entries are copied to the dsmsched pru file that is stored in the same directory as the schedule log Examples Options file schedlogretention 30 S Command line schedlogretention 30 S This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 129 Schedmode The schedmode option specifies whether you want to use the polling mode your client node periodically queries the server for scheduled work or the prompted mode the server contacts your client node when it is time to start a scheduled operation All communication methods can use the client polling mode but only TCP IP can use the server prompted mode Note This option applies only if you are using the TCP IP communication method and the schedule command is running Your administrator can specify that the server support both modes or just one mode If your administrator specifies that both modes are supported you can select either schedule mode If your administrator specifies only one mode you must specify that mode in y
137. e Manager establishes connection to the server only once for interactive mode a series of commands can process more quickly Tivoli Storage Manager processes the commands and returns to the tsm gt prompt Process Commands in Batch Mode When you enter a single command in batch mode precede it with the executable program name dsmc For example to process the incremental command in batch mode you would enter dsmc incremental If a password is required Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you each time you enter a command if the passwordaccess option is set to prompt and authentication on the server is set to On Type your password and press Enter You can also enter your password using the password option with a command but your password appears on the screen For example if your password is secret enter dsmc incremental password secret 182 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide If you set the passwordaccess option to generate in your dsm opt file you do not need to specify the password with the command Tivoli Storage Manager only prompts you for your password if you are registering your workstation with a server or manually changing your password Process Commands in Interactive Mode Use the interactive mode to enter a series of commands Enter dsmc on the command line and press Enter When the tsm gt command prompt appears type the command name and press Enter Do not prece
138. e Manager stops after displaying the number of lines specified by scrolllines or it scrolls to the end of the list El El ko E verbose Specifies that processing information should display on your screen The alternative is quiet This option can be overridden by the server Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 73 Authorization Options These options control access to a Tivoli Storage Manager server Table 22 Authorization Options Option Description Reference encryptkey nwpufile nwuser Specifies whether to save the encryption key locally or whether to prompt the user for the encryption key Specifies whether to encrypt and save a NetWare user s ID and password to the TSM PWD file Specifies a user ID and password to connect to a NetWare server when you start a session 20 password Specifies a Tivoli Storage Manager password passwordaccess Specifies how Tivoli Storage Manager handles a password if one is required for your workstation passworddir Specifies the directory in which you want to store the automatically generated password for your client node The encryption key and password are encrypted and stored in the TSM PWD file El cl El l El revokeremoteaccess Restricts an administrator with client access privileges from accessing your workstation through the Web client Bl Error Processing Options These options specify the name of the error log
139. e Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon CAD manages the scheduler the Web client or both Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option See LCon J for instructions to set up the CAD to manage the scheduler The CAD serves as an external timer for the scheduler When the scheduler is started it queries the server for the next scheduled event The event is either executed immediately or the scheduler exits The CAD restarts the scheduler when it is time to execute the scheduled event Notes 1 If you set the schedmode option to prompt the server prompts the CAD when it is time to run the schedule The scheduler will connect and disconnect to the server when the CAD is first started 2 Set the passwordaccess option to generate in your client options so that Tivoli poses Manager generates your password automatically See l Passwordaccess for more information 3 The CAD console displays information about the next scheduled event Using the managedservices option can provide the following benefits e Memory retention problems that may occur when using traditional methods of running the scheduler are resolved Using the CAD to manage the scheduler requires very little memory between scheduled operations e The CAD can manage both the scheduler program and the Web client reducing the number of background processes on your workstation e By default if you do not specify the managedserv
140. e command may not summarize client activity Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt RESOURceutilization number gt lt Parameters number Specifies the level of resources the Tivoli Storage Manager server and client can use during processing The range of values that you can specify is 1 through 10 Examples Options file resourceutilization 7 Command line Does not apply 124 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Retryperiod The retryperiod option specifies the number of minutes the client scheduler waits between attempts to process a scheduled command that fails or between unsuccessful attempts to report results to the server Use this option only when the scheduler is running Your administrator can also set this option If your administrator specifies a value for this option that value overrides the value in your client options file after your client node successfully contacts the server Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt RETRYPeriod minutes gt lt Parameters minutes Specifies the number of minutes the client scheduler waits between attempts to
141. e error log with a different date when pruning the log When changing the date format copy the schedule log and error log if you want to preserve log entries that contain a different date format Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt DATEformat format_number gt lt Parameters format_number Displays the date using one of the following formats Select the number that corresponds to the date format you want to use 1 MM DD YYYY This is the default 2 DD MM YYYY 3 YYYY MM DD 4 DD MM YYYY 5 YYYYMM DD Examples Options file dateformat 3 Command line date 4 This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode If you use this option in interactive mode it remains in effect for the entire interactive session or until you enter another dateformat option Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 85 Dirmc The dirmc option specifies the management class you want to use for directories If you do not specify this option to associate a management class with directories the client program uses the management class in the active policy set of your policy domain with the longest retention period Select a management class for individual directories that retains directories at least as long as it retains the files associated with them If you specify a management class with this option all directories specified in a backup operation are bound to
142. e incremental selective or archive commands information may appear about each file that is backed up Use the quiet option if you do not want to display this information When you use the quiet option error and processing information appears on your screen and messages are written to log files If you do not specify quiet the default option verbose is used Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define the quiet option and override the client setting Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt QUIET gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Options file quiet Command line quiet This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 121 Replace The replace option specifies what you want the system to do when it restores files that already exist on your workstation This option applies to the restore retrieve and restore backupset commands only Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax Prompt gt gt REPlace gt lt All Yes Parameters Prompt You are prompted whether to overwrite a file that already exists on your workstation If the existing file is read only
143. e path that contain the file are also backed up Directories and NDS container objects are counted in the number of objects backed up There are three types of incremental backup full incremental Incremental By Date and selective You can use all types of backup to back up the NDS In addition Tivoli Storage Manager saves trustee rights file attributes name spaces and associated name space information with the backup versions of the files Full Incremental Backup The first time you run a full incremental backups Tivoli Storage Manager backs up all of the files and directories on the volumes you specify This process can take a long time if you have several files to back up Successive full incremental backups will only back up new and changed files This allows the backup server to maintain current versions of your NetWare server files without having to waste time or space by backing up files that already exist in server storage Depending on your storage management policies the server may keep more than one version of your files in storage The most recently backed up files are active backup versions Older copies of your backed up files are inactive versions However if you delete a file from your NetWare server the backup server will not maintain an active backup version of that file If you need to retrieve a file you have deleted ou will need to access the backup server s inactive file versions See 9J for more information ab
144. e server tsm gt res backupset sys 34477804 ost su y rep all loc file If you copy a backup set from the Tivoli Storage Manager server to the NetWare server in order to restore it you must specify loc file The backup set can reside on NetWare volumes CDROM DVD or a similar device that can be mounted as a volume with files that can be accessed as file specifications You cannot restore a subset of files from a local backup set The following error message appears Invalid source file specification Attention If the object you want to restore is part of a backup set generated on a node and the node name is changed on the server any backup set objects that were generated prior to the name change will not match the new node name Ensure that the node name is the same as the node for which the backup set was generated You can restore backup sets in a storage area network SAN by specifying the location server option to restore the backup set directly from the server via the LAN Syntax gt gt REStore BACKUPSET backupsetname gt options Filenaie _ sourcertenee 216 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide gt lt destinationfi Heep Parameters options You can use these command line options with the restore backupset options You can use these common options with the restore backupset command quiet replace su
145. e to mount This is the default Yes You are prompted when a tape is required to back up archive restore or retrieve data At the prompt you can wait for the appropriate tape to be mounted always wait for a tape to be mounted skip a particular object skip all objects on a single tape skip all objects on all tapes or cancel the entire operation Examples Options file tapeprompt yes Command line tapep yes This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode 136 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Tcpbuffsize The tcpbuffsize option specifies the size of the internal TCP IP communication buffer Although it uses more memory a larger buffer can improve communication performance Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt TCPBuffsize size gt lt Parameters size Specifies the size in kilobytes that you want to use for the internal TCP IP communication buffer The range of values is 1 through 512 the default is 31 Depending on the operating system communication settings your system might not accept all values in the range of 1 through 512 Examples Options file tcpb 2 Command line tcpbuffsize 31 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 137 Tcpclientaddress The tcpclientaddr
146. e with a management class name boot To prepare a computer system for operation by loading an operating system C central scheduling A function permitting an administrator to schedule backup and archive operations from a central location Schedule operations on a periodic basis or on an explicit date client A program running on a file server PC workstation or terminal that requests services of another program called the server There are two types of Tivoli Storage Manager clients administrative and backup archive See administrative client and backup archive client client domain The set of drives file systems or volumes selected by a user for processing during a backup or archive operation client node A file server or workstation registered with the server on which the backup archive client program is installed client polling A client and server communication technique where the client node queries the server for scheduled work 246 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide client server A communications network architecture in which one or more programs clients request computing or data services from another program the server closed registration A registration process in which a Tivoli Storage Manager administrator must register workstations as client nodes with the server Contrast with open registration command line interface A type of user interface where com
147. eached the client sends the files to the server even if the transaction byte limit is not reached Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt TXNBytelimit number gt lt Parameters number Specifies the number of kilobytes the client program can buffer together in a transaction before it sends data to the server The range of values is 300 through 2097152 2 GB the default is 2048 Examples Options file txnb 2048 Command line txnb 2048 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 144 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Verbose The verbose option specifies that you want processing information to display on your screen This is the default When you run the incremental selective or archive commands information displays about each file that is backed up Use the quiet option if you do not want to display this information The following behavior applies when using the verbose and quiet options e If the server specifies either the quiet or verbose option in the server client option set the server settings override the client values even if force is set to No on the server e If you specify quiet in your dsm opt file and you specify verbose on the command line verbose prevails e If you specify both quiet and verbose on the same command the last option encoun
148. ecause the client program searches all subdirectories of a directory that is being processed processing can take longer to complete Specify Yes only when necessary Note If you use the preservepath option in addition to subdir yes it can affect which subdirectories are processed For more information see Examples Options file subdir no Command line 134 Tivoli Storage Manager To restore the structure for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide path2 dirl path2 dirl filel path2 dirl dir2 path2 dirl dir2 filel enter any of the following commands dsmc rest sys path nds1 sys path2 su y dsmc rest sys path ndsl file sys path2 su y dsmc rest sys path nds1 filel sys path2 su y Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 135 Tapeprompt The tapeprompt option specifies whether you want to wait for a tape to mount if it is required for a backup archive restore or retrieve process or to be prompted for a choice Tape prompting does not occur during a scheduled operation regardless of the setting for the tapeprompt option The tapeprompt option can be used with the following commands archive incremental restore retrieve selective Note The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No ewone e n Yes Parameters No You are not prompted for your choice The server waits for the appropriate tap
149. ects types over existing objects Server References Other objects such as User objects have optional attributes such as Home Directory and Default Server which reference Server objects When you delete the Server object these references are also deleted Restoring objects with server references is much like restoring files with trustee assignments First the Server object must be recreated then the objects which have references to the server must be restored to correctly restore the server references Current Backup Limitations To summarize the following is a list of the current NDS backup limitations inherent in the SMS architecture e Partition or replica boundaries are not backed up e Partial restores are not practical due to object references Novell is aware of these limitations and is working to provide solutions in the future Backup Recommendations e Backup the entire NDS tree periodically Ensure that the DIRECTORY is included in the domain of at least one of your nightly scheduled backups Use include exclude processing to potentially divide larger NDS tree backups over several servers e Exploit partition replication Replicate each partition at least three times potentially having replicas in different physical locations e Keep a blueprint of the NDS tree Partition boundary information replica assignments and schema extensions are not currently protected by the backup process Keep an accurate blueprint of t
150. ects which referenced the failed Server object and failed Volume object s as well as the volume data including trustee data Perform the following steps to ensure recovery 1 If the failed server contains any Master partitions reassign the master to another server using the DSREPAIR utility 2 Replace the failed hard disk s Reinstall the NetWare OS and NDS on the server If a backup copy of Hie server specific information is available install the NetWare OS See for more information If a backup copy of the server apai informean is not available use the NWCONFIG NLM utility on NetWare with the following precautions e Use the same server name in the install e Use the same admin parent container and password as the last NDS backup e Ensure all hard disk partitions are at least as large as they were on the failed server e Use the same volume names as on the failed server Ensure that the NetWare OS has the correct patches for Tivoli Storage Manager to function properly Refer to the client readme 1st file shipped with the Tivoli Storage Manager client for more information about dependencies on NetWare OS patches If the server had volumes other then SYS and these volumes were not affected by the failure run DSREPAIR to purge the file system of invalid trustees on those volumes This step cleans up the volume DETs and FETs so that the trustee assignments can be restored correctly At the server console Tivoli S
151. ed from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products If you are viewing this information softcopy the photographs and color illustrations may not appear 244 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Glossary Term definitions in this glossary pertain to the Tivoli Storage Manager library If you do not find a term you are looking for you can refer to the following publications e IBM Dictionary of Computing at URL http www ibm com networking nsg nsgmain htm e Tivoli Software Glossary at URL http www tivoli com support documents glossary termsm03 htm This glossary may include terms and definitions from e The American National Standard Dictionary for Information Systems ANSI X3 172 1990 copyright ANSI You can purchase copies from the American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street New York New York 10036 e The Information Technology Vocabulary developed by Subcommittee 1 Joint Technical Committee 1 of the International Organization for Standardization and the International Electrotechnical Commission ISO IEC JTC2 SC1 A absolute A copy group mode
152. ed in the include exclude list and meet the requirement for serialization in the backup copy group of the management class assigned to each file Contrast with incremental backup serialization A copy group attribute that specifies whether a file can be modified during a backup or archive operation See static dynamic shared static and shared dynamic server A program running on a mainframe workstation or file server that provides shared services such as backup and archive to other various often remote programs called clients server prompted scheduling A client server communication technique where the server contacts the client node when tasks need to be done session A period of time in which a user can communicate with a server to perform backup archive restore or retrieve requests shared dynamic A Tivoli Storage Manager copy group serialization mode This mode specifies if a file changes during backup or archive and continues to change after a number of retries The last retry commits the file to the Tivoli Storage Manager server whether or not the file changed during backup or archive Contrast with dynamic shared static and static shared static A copy group serialization value specifying that a file must not be modified during a backup or archive operation Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to retry the operation a number of times If the file is in use during each attempt the file is not backed up or archived See seri
153. ed up Frequency is ignored for partial incremental backups See ng Managemen a a a 9 for more information Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Incremental By Date Backup For a disk or volume to be eligible for incremental by date backups you must first perform a full incremental backup of that entire disk or volume Running an incremental backup of only a directory branch or individual file will will not make the disk or volume eligible for incremental by date backups To perform an incremental by date backup see Bone for more information The client backs up only new and changed files with a modification date later than the date of the last incremental backup stored at the server unless you exclude the file from backup services Files added at the client after the last incremental backup but with a modification date earlier than the last incremental are not backed up The directories in the path that contain the file are also backed up unless they already exist on the server A directory that already exists on the server is only backed up again if its modification timestamp changes The files under the directory are also backed up even if their modification timestamps have not changed If you run an incremental by date backup of the whole file system the server updates the date and time of the last incremental If you perform an incremental by date backup on only part of a
154. ee retrieve processing DIRectory or NDS Retrieves the NDS destinationfilespec Specifies the path and file name where you want to retrieve the files to The path and file name must follow DOS naming conventions If you do not specify a destination Tivoli Storage Manager restores the files to the original source path Examples Task Retrieve a single file named budget 218 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Task Task Task Task Task Command dsmc ret sys projecta budget Retrieve all files with an extension of bak from the sys projecta directory Command dsmc retrieve sys projecta bak Retrieve files in the sys project directory Use the pick option Command dsmc ret sys project pick Retrieve all files from the sys projecta directory that end with the characters bak to the sys projectn directory Command dsmc ret projecta bak servb sys projectn Note If the destination is a directory you must specify the delimiter as the last character of the destination If you omit the delimiter and your specified source is a directory or a file spec with a wildcard you will receive an error Retrieve all files in the sys home directory Command dsmc retrieve sys home Note To retrieve files contained in a subdirectory you must specify the subdirectory in another retrieve command Retrieve files in the sys project directory Use the pick optio
155. either restore or retrieve a user s files from Tivoli Storage Manager storage backup A function permitting users to copy one or more files to a storage pool to protect against data loss Contrast with restore backup archive client A program that runs on a file server PC or workstation and provides a means for users to back up archive restore and retrieve files Contrast with administrative client backup copy group A policy object that contains attributes controlling the generation destination and expiration of backup files The backup copy group belongs to a management class backup retention grace period The number of days Tivoli Storage Manager retains a backup version when the server is unable to rebind the file to an appropriate management class backup set A collection of active files in your file spaces that reside on the Tivoli Storage Manager server The Tivoli Storage Manager administrator creates the backup set and copies it onto portable media device that is supported by the Tivoli Storage Manager server and client backup version A backed up file directory or file space that resides in a backup storage pool in Tivoli Storage Manager storage The active version is the most recent backup version See active version and inactive version bindery A database that consists of three system files for a NetWare 3 11 3 12 server The files contain user IDs and user restrictions binding The process of associating a fil
156. en you want to specify multiple files with similar names in one command Without wildcard characters you must repeat the command for each file Valid wildcard characters that you can use include s Asterisk Matches zero or more characters Question mark Matches any single character at the present position able 30 shows examples of each wildcard Table 30 Wildcard Characters Pattern Matches Does Not Match Asterisk ab ab abb abxxx a b aa bb ab rs abrs abtrs abrsrs ars aabrs abrss ab ef rs abefrs abefghrs abefr abers abcd abcd c abcd txt abcd abcdc abcdtxt Question Mark ab abc ab abab abzzz ab rs abfrs abrs ablirs ab ef rs abdefjrs abefrs abdefrs abefjrs ab rs abcdrs abzzrs abrs abjrs abkkkrs Entering Commands Follow the general rules below when you enter commands e Enter a maximum of 80 characters on the command line Enter the characters in a continuous string If you press the return key the command will process e When you enter options with a command always precede the option with a dash e Enter more than one option in any order in a command before or after the file specification Separate multiple options with a blank space Client Commands Reference The following sections contain detailed information about each of the Tivoli Storage Manager commands These commands are arranged in alphabetical order Information for each command include
157. ental backup To perform a selective backup see more information Unlike incremental backups a selective backup e Does not cause the server to update the date and time of the last incremental Chapter 4 Backing Up Your Data 31 e Backs up directory and file entries even if their modification timestamp or permissions have not changed Support for Long Names If you have file names longer than the DOS name space permits you can specify that Tivoli Storage Manager stores the long names during backup Long names with spaces must be enclosed in double quotes Tivoli Storage Manager Client Version 5 1 0 does not perform a conversion from a long to a short name space If the Tivoli Storage Manager server name space is NTW LONG but the local volume does not have long name support Tivoli Storage Manager Client Version 5 1 0 issues an error message and ceases any backup or archive operation If you want to continue backing up using long names add the long name space support back to the volume in question You can also use a short name to back up the volume by renaming the file space on the server before attempting a back up Mac Name Space is Not Supported Tivoli Storage Manager does not support Macintosh name space If a NetWare volume has only DOS and Mac name spaces Tivoli Storage Manager uses the DOS name for Macintosh file names If you use only DOS and Mac names spaces on a NetWare volume you should add Long name space to that
158. er 238 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide 10 11 12 Ensure that the NetWare OS has the correct patches for Tivoli Storage Manager to function properly Refer to the client readme 1st file shipped with the Tivoli Storage Manager client for more information about dependencies on NetWare OS patches If the server had volumes other then SYS and these volumes were not affected by the failure run DSREPAIR to purge the file system of invalid trustees on those volumes This step cleans up the volume DETs and FETs so that the trustee assignments can be restored correctly At the server console LOAD DSREPAIR and choose the Unattended Full Repair option This automatically purges invalid trustee assignments Install Tivoli Storage Manager and reestablish the communications protocol Use the NWCONFIG NLM utility to reinstall the Tivoli Storage Manager code on the NetWare server Reconfigure the communications protocol so that the Tivoli Storage Manager client can communicate with the Tivoli Storage Manager server Load the necessary SMS target service agents At the target NetWare server console enter load tsands load tsa500 NetWare 5 or load tsa600 NetWare 6 Delete any objects which had server specific references See Ds on page 234 for more information about objects which reference the server object Restore the replicas You can do this by issuing a restore at the re
159. er Print jobs which are queued to be printed i e status Ready have no special attributes and can be processed by Tivoli Storage Manager as normal files Individual administrators must decide whether to backup queued print jobs Since these files are temporary and can be quite large we recommend that these files be excluded from Tivoli Storage Manager processing After a restore however you must resubmit the print jobs if they are not processed by Tivoli Storage Manager Other Related File and Directory Entries There are two other files related to the print queues which should be mentioned which are used by the print server to reference the printer and print queues PRINT id and QUEUE id These files reside in a directory entry under QUEUES which correlates to the print server object id DATA QUEUES 05000004 PRINT 000 DATA QUEUES 05000004 QUEUE 000 These files can be processed normally by Tivoli Storage Manager and thus need no special consideration These files do not appear to be used in the NetWare 4 and 5 environments although they are present Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare Backup and Recovery Guide 241 Include Exclude Recommendations for Print Queues We recommend that you back up the print queue directories but exclude the files contained in these directories since Tivoli Storage Manager cannot open them To do this you can specify the following exclude statement in your dsm opt file EXCLUDE lt vol gt QUEUES
160. er user 47 inactive version 42 NetWare server to another 47 overview 41 related topics 46 retain extra versions attribute 62 retain only versions attribute 62 retain versions attribute 63 retention grace period archive 60 67 backup 60 67 retrieve maximum file size 185 sorting file list 24 summary of options 72 using the Web client 20 using Web client GUI 52 retrieve command 51 218 retrieving files another node s files 47 authorizing another user 47 NetWare server to another 47 overview 51 retry backup 78 retryperiod option 125 return codes 53 revokeremoteaccess option 126 rules 59 257 Index S schedcmddisabled option 127 schedlogname option 128 schedlogretention option 129 schedmode option 130 schedule command 220 schedule log pruning 129 scheduled commands enabling disabling 57 scheduled events displaying 208 scheduled services 53 disabling scheduled commands 127 displaying completed work 56 displaying scheduled work 55 managed by client acceptor 55 resolving memory retention after scheduled backups 55 running 55 scheduling options 53 starting 55 scheduling options 53 scrolllines option 132 scrollprompt option 133 selective backup description 31 overview 36 process 40 using Web client GUI 37 selective command 36 221 serialization copy serialization dynamic 62 shared static 62 static 62 server establishing communications through firewall 23 establishing communications with 5 specifying TCP I
161. ers N or days Specifies how long to wait before pruning the error log N Do not prune the error log This permits the error log to grow indefinitely This is the default days The number of days to keep log file entries before pruning the log The range of values is zero through 9999 Dors Specifies whether to save the pruned entries Enter a space or comma to separate this parameter from the previous one D Discard the error log entries when you prune the log This is the default S Save the error log entries when you prune the log The pruned entries are copied from the error log to the dsmerlog pru file located in the same directory as the error log Examples Options file errorlogretention 400 S Command line errorlogr 400 S This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 92 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Exclude Options The exclude options exclude objects from backup or archive services For example you might want to exclude all temporary files any local caches of network files all files that contain compiled object code that you can easily reproduce using other methods or your operating system files You can exclude specific files from encryption processing during a backup Notes 1 When you exclude a file that was previously included existing backup versions become inactive during the next increme
162. erver is only notified when files are deleted from a client file space or directory during an incremental backup The number of versions saved on the Tivoli Storage Manager server is determined by the server settings For example the server may be set to only allow three copies Depending on the backup frequency your point in time window could be anywhere from a day assuming you backup once a day to several days assuming you backup up every other day A point in time restore will restore files deleted after the point in time date but not files deleted before Tivoli Storage Manager restores the versions from the most recent backup before the specified point in time Ensure the point in time you specify is not the same as the time and date that a back up was performed Point in time overrides object condition so that even if an object has an active backup from a later date the previous inactive copy is returned The point in time command line options pitdate and pittime are used with the query and restore commands For example when pitdate and pittime are used with the query backup command the date and time values specified in the pitdate and pittime parameters are used to establish the point in time for which file information is returned When pitdate and pittime are used with the restore command the date and time values specified in the pitdate and pittime parameters are used to establish the point in time for which files are returned
163. es in the path that contain the file are also backed up unless they already exist on the server A directory that already exists on the server is only backed up again if its permissions or time stamp change Directories and NDS container objects count in the number of objects backed up To exclude directories from backup use the exclude dir option For more about exclude dir see Understanding Which Files are Backed Up When you requst a backup Tivoli Storage Manager backs up a file if all of the follwing requirements are met e You do not exclude the file backup in your include exclude list If you do not have an include exclude list all files will be candidates for backup e The selected management class contains a backup copy group See Chapter 7 for more information on management classes and back p cop groups e The file meets the serialization requirements defined in the backup copy group If serialization is static or shared static and the file is in use during back up the backup does not occur See for more information e The file meets the mode requirements defined in the backup copy group If the mode is modified the file must have changed since the last backup If the mode is absolute the file can be backed up even if it does not change See e The file meets the frequency requirements defined in the backup copy group The specified minimum number of days since the last backup must elapse before a file is back
164. ess option specifies a TCP IP address if your client node has more than one address and you want the server to contact an address other than the one that was used to make the first server contact Use this option only if you use the prompted parameter with the schedmode option or when the schedule command is running Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt TCPCLIENTAddress client_address Parameters client_address Specifies the TCP IP address you want the server to use to contact your client node Specify a TCP IP Internet dot address only Examples Options file tcpclienta 128 33 10 249 Command line tcpclientaddress 128 33 10 249 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 138 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Tcpclientport The tcpclientport option specifies a different TCP IP port number for the server to contact than the one that was used to make the first server contact If the default port or the specified port is busy the server attempts to use any available port Use this option only if you specify the prompted parameter with the schedmode option or when the schedule command is running Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not sup
165. esting but be aware of its existence and its ramifications Testing Verification You can verify the NDS tree after a restore operation by running a DSREPAIR operation against the NDS either an unattended full repair or local DS repair This operation will produce a log reporting any inconsistencies found in the NDS Trustee assignments to files and directories can be spot checked after a restore operation to verify their validity NDS Restore Considerations This section outlines recovery procedures for the following scenarios e Loss of a non SYS volume e Loss of SYS volume or entire server e Loss of entire NDS Example 1 Loss of a Non SYS Volume NDS information is stored only on the SYS volume Therefore if you experience a hard disk failure on a non SYS volume you do not have to modify or restore any part of the NDS tree You only need to restore file system data including file and trustee data To restore a non SYS volume after a hard disk failure 1 Do not delete the Volume object for the failed volume from the NDS tree In this situation you can leave the Volume object in the NDS tree to preserve any references that other objects may have to the failed volume If the Volume object is deleted you will need to replace any objects that have references to the failed volume to reestablish the references correctly 2 Bring down the server and replace the failed hard disk s 3 Bring the server up and recreate the v
166. eve fromnode Displays file spaces for an alternate query archive Led node Also specifies an alternate node query backup from which to restore or retrieve files query filespace query mgmtclass restore retrieve fromtime Specifies a beginning time on the query archive ked specified date Use with the fromdate query backup option This option is ignored if the restore fromdate option is absent retrieve ifnewer Replaces existing files with the latest restore Leal backup version only if the backup restore backupset version is newer than the existing retrieve version 150 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Table 26 Client Command Options continued Command Option Description Commands Page inactive Displays a list of active and inactive query backup Ls files when used with the pick option restore incrbydate Requests an incremental backup by incremental Led date latest Restores the most recent backup restore Lej version of a file whether it is active or inactive location Specifies whether Tivoli Storage query backupset Leg Manager searches for a backup seton restore backupset the server or in local files during a query or restore operation noprompt Suppresses the confirmation prompt delete archive kad when deleting an archived file optfile Specifies the options file you want to dsmc exe izd use when you start a session
167. example exclude dir nw6 sys test dan datal excludes nw6 sys test dan datal its files and all its subdirectories and their files However you can still back up nw6 sys test dan datal its files and all its subdirectories and their files using a selective backup as follows dsmc sel subdir yes nw6 sys test dan datal However the next time you perform an incremental backup these backup versions are expired If you exclude a directory that was previously included Tivoli Storage Manager marks existing backup versions of the files and directories beneath it inactive during the next incremental backup Use this option to exclude a portion of your data in which no underlying files need to be backed up The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option exclude encrypt Excludes the specified files from encryption processing Parameters pattern Specifies the file or group of files that you want to exclude End the pattern with a file specification Note If you do not specify a server name Tivoli Storage Manager uses the local server name If the pattern begins with a single or double quote or contains any embedded blanks or equal signs you must surround the value in either single or double quotation marks The opening and closing quotation marks must be the same type of quotation marks 94 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file
168. f the entire NDS tree When restored you can use utilities like NWADMIN or PARTMGER to reset the partition boundaries within the tree Replicas Partition replication is the best mechanism to protect NDS information against loss in a multi server environment We recommend that you replicate each partition at least three times If possible do not store all replicas in the same location in case a disaster devastates the entire location Replica assignments i e Master Read Write Read Only Subordinate are not backed up by SMS This information should be part of your NDS tree blueprint and can be reset using NetWare utilities Schema The schema is the set of rules which governs the properties of the NDS structural relationships object properties etc The schema is global and is replicated on each server that contains an NDS replica Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide OEM products can extend the schema to create new object classes These extensions are globally copied to each server that contains an NDS replica Therefore in a multi server environment the loss of a single server would not effect the schema extensions In the case of a loss of the entire NDS e g a single server environment the base schema is available when the initial NDS is created by the NetWare install procedure Ql for complete information about backing up ad ane the schema Object References S
169. fic command With the exception of the restore and retrieve commands when you use the filelist option Tivoli Storage Manager ignores all other file specifications on the command line Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option The files entries listed in the filelist must adhere to the following rules e Each entry must be a fully qualified path to a file or directory Specify only fully qualified paths e Each entry must be on a new line e Do not use wildcard characters e Each entry results in the processing of only one object file or directory e If the file name contains any spaces enclose the file name with quotes e Tivoli Storage Manager ignores any entry that is not valid The following is an example of a list of files and directories within a filelist serverb sys proj dir filel serverb sys public tivoli file2 serva sys acctng avi dirl serva sys books dir2 file3 e sys dir Ha Ha Ha file txt e sys messages file txt If an entry in the filelist indicates a directory only that directory will process and not the files within the directory If the file name the filelistspec you specify with the filelist option does not exist the command fails Tivoli Storage Manager skips any entries in the filelist that are not valid files or directories Tivoli Storage Manager logs errors and processing continues to the next entry Use file specifications with the restore and retrieve command
170. fic information of SERVER A onto SERVER B by issuing the following command from SERVER B load dsmc restore server a serverspecifcinfo server b serverspecificinfo replace yes The server specific information for SERVER A is restored to the following location server b sys system server a Note If the NetWare server name you are restoring is more than eight characters the directory name created during the server specific information restore is truncated to eight characters Tivoli Storage Manager restores the following files during the server specific information restore SERVDATA NDS Contains the information needed by the NetWare installation procedure to restore the server object to its original state DSMISC LOG A text file containing various NDS information including the server s replica list VOLSINFO TXT A text file which contains the full server name i e if the directory name had been truncated a list of volumes present on the server at the time of the last server specific information backup the name spaces Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare Backup and Recovery Guide 231 and extend file formats e g compression enabled on the volumes This file is meant to aid the user during server recovery AUTOEXEC NCF The server s autoexec ncf file STARTUP NCF The server s startup ncf file 2 Reinstall the NetWare operating system on the failed server You must specify the same FILE SERVER NAME and the same IPX I
171. file and how Tivoli Storage Manager treats the entries in the log file Table 23 Error Processing Options Option Description Page errorlogname Specifies the path and name of the error log errorlogretention Specifies the number of days to keep log file entries in the error log and whether to save pruned entries nwwaitonerror Specifies whether an error message is displayed if an error occurs while exiting a session If this option is set to no the window closes automatically and the client program returns to the NetWare console 74 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Transaction Processing Options These options control how Tivoli Storage Manager processes transactions between the client and server Table 24 Transaction Processing Options Option commrestartduration Description Specifies the maximum number of minutes you want the client to try to reconnect to a Tivoli Storage Manager server after a communication error occurs Page BO commrestartinterval Specifies the number of seconds you want the client to wait between attempts to reconnect to a Tivoli Storage Manager server after a communication error occurs largecommbuffers Specifies whether the client will use increased buffers to transfer large amounts of data between the client and the server resourceutilization txnbytelimit Specifies a threshold
172. file for NDS interactively Command dsmc q tsa nds nwpwfile yes Example 1 A sample output for query tsa follows Tivoli Storage Manager Command Line Backup Client Interface Version 3 Release 1 C Copyright IBM Corporation 1990 1999 All Rights Reserved Node Name GOETHE Session established with server spikes Windows NT Server Version 3 Release 1 Level 0 1 Server date time 16 04 1999 16 09 52 Last access 16 04 1999 16 08 39 Connecting to a NetWare File System goethe Connected to goethe TSA Name goethe TSA Module Name TSA410 NLM TSA Version 4 14 0 SMDR Version 1 0 0 User Password Location goethe sys tsm 030199 74cc82cb pwd User Password Valid Yes tsm gt Example 2 A sample output for query tsa nds no password file present follows Tivoli Storage Manager Command Line Backup Client Interface Version 3 Release 7 C Copyright IBM Corporation 1990 1999 All Rights Reserved Node Name goethe Session established with server spikes Windows NT Server Version 3 Release 1 Level 0 1 Server date time 06 04 1999 16 09 52 Last access 06 04 1999 16 08 39 Connecting to a Novell Directory goethe_tree Please enter NetWare user for goethe_tree admin adsm Please enter the password on goethe_tree for NetWare user admin adsm Connected to goethe_tree NetWare TSA Information TSA Name goethe TSA Module Name tsands TSA Ve
173. file is in use each time Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to back it up the file is not backed up For selective backups Tivoli Storage Manager does not check frequency or mode and does not check to see whether a file has changed since it was last backed up The only criteria for selective backups are that the file is not excluded from backup services and the management class associated with it has a backup copy group When you run a selective backup Tivoli Storage Manager also backs up all directory information You can exclude the files within a directory but you cannot exclude a directory from being backed up Directories and NDS containers are counted in the number of objects backed up When you use the volinformation option with the selective command volume information such as disk space restrictions and volume root directory trustee rights are backed up 40 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 5 Restoring Your Data You can use the restore command to restore backup versions of specific files a group of files with similar names entire directories or backup sets For more information on restoring backup sets see As a quick reference this chapter contains instructions for the following tasks Table 11 Restoring Your Data Task Page A A S N Gd E e E No Query Restore When you enter an unrestricted wildcard source file specific
174. follows Chapter 4 Backing Up Your Data 37 38 1 Click the Backup button from the main window The Backup by Tree window appears 2 Expand the directory tree by clicking on the sign Click the selection boxes next to the object or objects you want to back up 3 Select one of the following backup types from the pull down menu a To run an incremental backup click Incremental complete b To run an incremental backup by date click Incremental date only c To run a selective backup click Always backup 4 To modify specific backup options click the Options button Any options you change are effective during the current session only 5 Click Backup The Backup Task List window displays the backup processing status When processing completes the Backup Report window displays processing details Considerations e Select File details on the View menu to display file attributes for any file e The following functions are not supported on the Web client Estimate View Policy Information Access Another User Searching and Filtering User Access List Preferences Editor Backing Up Open Files Some files on your system may be in use when you try backing them up these are called open files because they are opened by an application for its use Because an open file may change it is likely that any backup of an open file will not correctly reflect the contents of the file at a given time There are s
175. for Directories If the management class in your active policy set containing the longest retention period meets your backup requirements for directories it is not necessary to take any action to associate directories with that management class Tivoli Storage Manager does it automatically when it backs up your directories If the default management class does not meet your requirements select a management class with an adequate retention period specified on the retain only version parameter You should keep directories at least as long as you keep the files associated with those directories Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies 65 To assign a management class other than the default to directories use the dirmc option in your client options file For example to assign a management class named direct1 to your directories you would enter dirmc directl Note For archive operations directories are assigned to a management class whose retention period meets or exceeds that of the files contained in those directories The management class is rebound as needed to ensure that directories with files do not expire Binding and Rebinding Management Classes to Files Binding associates a file with a management class When you back up a file for the first time Tivoli Storage Manager binds it to either the default management class or the management class specified in your include exclude list In later backups of the same file
176. for more information filespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to query Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all the files in a directory DIRectory or NDS Displays a list of archived NDS files Examples Task Display a list of all your archived files in the servera sys volume Command dsmc q ar sub y servera sys Task Display a list of all your archived files on servera sys Use the dateformat and timeformat options to reformat the dates and times Command dsmc q ar sub yes date 5 time 4 servera sys Task Display a list of archived files in the servera sys u proj directory whose first four characters of the file name begin with proj Use the dateformat and timeformat options Command dsmc q ar date 1 time 4 servera sys uproj proj Chapter 11 Using Commands 201 Query Backup The query backup command displays a list of backup versions of your files File information includes the file specification size backup date whether the file is active or inactive and the management class assigned to the file Only the first ten characters of the management class name are displayed Syntax M gt gt Query Backup filespec 7 gt lt options DIRectory or NDS Parameters options You can use these command line options with the query backup command dirsonly filelist filesonly fromdate fromnode fromtime todate totime For for
177. g Example 2a Single Server Network In a single server network the loss of the SYS volume implies the loss of the entire NDS To restore the server perform the following steps 1 Replace the failed hard disk s 2 Reinstall the NetWare OS and NDS on the server This step replaces the Server and Volume object s Using the NWCONFIG NLM utility on NetWare note the following precautions e Use the same server name in the install e Use the same admin parent container and password as the last NDS backup e Ensure all hard disk partitions are at least as large as they were on the failed server e Use the same volume names as on the failed server This step replaces the Server and Volume object s 3 Ensure that the NetWare OS has the correct patches for Tivoli Storage Manager to function properly Refer to the clientreadme 1st file for more information about dependencies on NetWare OS patches 4 If the server had volumes other then SYS and these volumes were not affected by the failure run DSREPAIR to purge the file system of invalid trustees on those volumes This step cleans up the volume directory entry tables DET and file entry tables FET so that the trustee assignments can be restored correctly At the server console LOAD DSREPAIR and choose the Unattended Full Repair option This automatically purges invalid trustee assignments 5 Install Tivoli Storage Manager and reestablish the communications protocol Use the
178. g on screen 145 stop displaying 121 migrating from earlier versions of the product 1 modes batch 182 interactive loop 183 modified mode 63 multiple sessions backup objects using 36 N name space migration to long 32 NAS deleting file spaces 191 NetWare client accessing remote NetWare servers 15 client components 2 communication methods 2 hardware requirements 2 operating system requirements 2 storage management services 2 updating autoexec ncf file 5 NetWare server connections number 24 Network Attached Storage NAS file server deleting file spaces 191 display file spaces on server 204 Querying file system images belonging to 202 no query restore 41 node name 5 node option summary 70 nodename option 47 106 noprompt option 169 numberformat option 107 nwignorecompressbit option 108 nwpwiile option 39 109 nwuser option 39 110 nwwaitonerror option 112 O online books installing NetWare 3 online help displaying 25 online forum 25 service and technical support 25 online Help forum 25 open file backing up 38 open registration permissions 7 using 7 operating system requirements NetWare client 2 optfile option 170 optional parameters 184 options archive summary 70 archme 153 authorization summary 74 backup summary 70 central scheduling summary 72 changingretries 78 command processing summary 73 commmethod 79 commrestartduration 80 commrestartinterval 81 communication summary 69 compressa
179. gher than the network data transfer rate This is because the backup archive client can have multiple simultaneous sessions with the backup server When multiple sessions are open during backup the data transfer time represents the sum of the times reported by all sessions In this case aggregate data transfer time is mistakenly reported as higher However when running with a single session the aggregate data transfer rate should always be reported as lower than the network data transfer rate e Objects compressed by Specifies the number of file data bytes sent over the net divided by the original size of the file on disk For example if the net data bytes are 10K and the file is 100K then Objects compressed by 1 10240 102400 x 100 90 e Elapsed processing time The active processing time to complete a command This is calculated by subtracting the starting time of a command process from the ending time of the completed command process e Total number of bytes transferred e LanFree bytes transferred Using the Web Client to Back Up Data You can use Tivoli Storage Manager to back up specific files a group of files with similar names or entire directories If you have the Web client acceptor started on your workstation you can_perform the backup tasks using the Web client backup archive GUI See Sta e information on starting the Web en You can perform the backup tasks using the Web client backup archive GUI as
180. h for backup copies or archived files Enter the date in the format you selected with the dateformat option When you include dateformat with a command it must precede the fromdate pitdate and todate options Examples Command line dsmc query backup fromdate 12 11 2002 sys proj h3 doc Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 161 Fromnode The fromnode option permits one node to perform commands for another node A user on another node must use the set access command to permit you to query list restore or retrieve files for that other node Syntax gt gt FROMNode node gt lt Parameters node Specifies the node name on a workstation or a file server whose backup copies or archived files you want to access Examples Command line dsmc query archive fromnode bob subdir yes sys 162 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Fromtime Use the fromtime option with the fromdate option to specify a beginning time from which you want to search for backed up or archived files Tivoli Storage Manager ignores this option if you do not specify the fromdate option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt FROMTime time gt lt Parameters time Specifies a beginning time on a specific date from which you want to search for backed up or archived files If you do not specify a time the time defaults to 23 59
181. he NDS tree so that this information is available after a disaster Testing Considerations We recommend that you rigorously test your backup plan before introducing it into a production environment This section introduces some considerations during the testing phase Realistic Test Scenarios To adequately test restoration of the NDS tree you must create an autonomous NDS tree It is not adequate to simply restore a tree to another server as the target 234 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide server is probably part of the same NDS tree as the source server If you want to merge or reorganize your NDS tree there are better tools available from Novell to achieve this The goal should be testing the recovery mechanism for loss of the entire NDS tree To do this properly an autonomous NDS tree must be created Synchronization Awareness The NDS relies on a synchronization process to ensure that all replicas hold identical information After changes are made to the NDS the synchronization may not be immediate This may affect testing in some instances For example there may be a situation where you are testing the restore of a single object You delete the object from a replica and then restore it using Tivoli Storage Manager The object still appears to exist to Tivoli Storage Manager because the replicas have not synchronized Synchronization should not play a major part of your t
182. he Retrieve window appears 2 Expand the directory tree by clicking on the sign Click the selection boxes next to the files or directories you want to retrieve 3 Click Retrieve The Retrieve Destination window appears Enter the appropriate information in the Retrieve Destination window 4 To modify specific retrieve options click the Retrieve Options button located to the right of the Estimate button Any options you change are effective during the current session only 5 Click Retrieve The Retrieve Status window displays the processing status 52 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 7 Automating Tasks Your administrator can schedule Tivoli Storage Manager to perform tasks automatically on a regular basis For example you can automatically back up files at the end of each day or archive some of your files every Friday This procedure known as central scheduling is a cooperative effort between the server and your client node Your administrator associates clients with one or more schedules that are part of the policy domain maintained in the server database The administrator defines central scheduling on the server and you start the client scheduler on your workstation Once you start the client scheduler further intervention is not necessary With client scheduling you can also e Display information about available schedules e Display information about w
183. hen the old password expires Automatic generation of a password prevents password prompting Password generation can be set in the options file passwordaccess option See options file gigabyte GB 1 One billion 10 bytes 2 When referring to memory capacity 1 073 741 824 in decimal notation graphical user interface GUI A graphical user interface offers pictoral rather than text based access to a computer A graphical user interface includes e A combination of graphics and icons e Use of a mouse or pointing device e Menu bars dropdown lists and overlapping windows Contrast with command line interface See windowed interface GUI Graphical user interface H hierarchical storage management client A program that runs on a workstation or file server to provide space management services The hierarchical storage management client automatically migrates eligible files to Tivoli Storage Manager storage to maintain specific levels of free space on local file systems Automatic recalls are made for migrated files when they are accessed Users are also permitted to migrate and recall specific files HSM Hierarchical Storage Management inactive version A copy of a backup file in Tivoli Storage Manager storage that either is not the most recent version or the corresponding original file was deleted from the client file system Inactive backup versions are eligible for expiration according to the management class assigned to
184. his Book xiii Syntax Diagram Description Example Optional Choice gt lt When an item is below the line that item is ra optional In the first example you can choose A or nothing at all gt lt When two or more items are in a stack below the line all of them are optional In the second example you can choose A B C or nothing at all Defaults Defaults are above the line The default is b gt lt selected unless you override it You can B override the default by including an option Lc from the stack below the line In this example A is the default You can override A by choosing B or C You can also specify the default explicitly Repeatable Choices A stack of items followed by an arrow returning to the left means you can select gt A more than one item or in some cases repeat e a single item Lc In this example you can choose any combination of A B or C gt lt Syntax Fragments Some diagrams because of their length must The fragment name pa fragment the syntax The fragment name appears between vertical bars in the diagram The expanded fragment appears between The fragment name vertical bars in the diagram after a heading with the same fragment name xiv Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Related Publications Included here is a lis
185. hive Services for Remote Servers You can request archive services for multiple NetWare file servers See Requesting ackup a a 9 for more information Performing Command Line Retrieves You retrieve a file when you want to return an archive copy from the server to your NetWare server You can retrieve a single file a group of files or all the files in a directory or subdirectory When you retrieve a file Tivoli Storage Manager sends you a copy of that file The archived file remains in storage You can also specify that you want to retrieve files you archived within a particular range of dates or that are due to expire within a particular range of dates Chapter 6 Archiving and Retrieving Files 51 Use the retrieve command to retrieve files Indicate the file you want retrieved and a destination If you do not indicate a destination the files are retrieved to their original location For example to retrieve the sys doc h1 doc file to its original directory use load dsmc retrieve sys doc hl doc To retrieve it under a new name use load dsmc retrieve sys doc hl doc sys doc h2 doc You can use the pick option to get a list of archives from which you can pick files amp for more information Using the Web Client to Retrieve Data You can use Tivoli Storage Manager Web client to retrieve archive copies of specific files or entire directories as follows 1 Click the Retrieve button from the main window T
186. ic A copy group serialization value that specifies Tivoli Storage Manager accept the first attempt to back up or archive an object regardless of any changes made during backup or archive processing See serialization Contrast with shared dynamic shared static and static E error log A text file written on disk that contains Tivoli Storage Manager processing error messages The Tivoli Storage Manager server detects and saves these errors exclude To identify files in an include exclude list that you do not want to include in a specific client operation such as backup or archive exabyte EB 1 For processor storage real and virtual storage and channel volume 1 152 921 504 606 846 976 bytes 2 For disk storage capacity and communications volume 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 bytes expiration The process in which files are identified for deletion because their expiration date or retention period is passed Backups or archives are marked for deletion based on the criteria defined in the backup or archive copy group expiring file A migrated or premigrated file that is marked for expiration and removal from Tivoli Storage Manager storage If a stub file or an original copy of a premigrated file is deleted from a local file system or if the original copy of a premigrated file is updated the corresponding migrated or premigrated file is marked for Glossary 247 expiration the next time reconciliation is run It expires and is remove
187. ices option the CAD manages the Web client to provide backward compatibility Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt MANAGEDServices gt lt Y mode Parameters mode Specifies whether the CAD manages the scheduler the Web client or both webclient Specifies that the CAD manages the Web client This is the default schedule Specifies that the CAD manages the scheduler 102 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file The following are examples of how you might specify the managedservices option in your options file Task Specify that the CAD manages the Web client only managedservices webclient Task Specify that the CAD manages the scheduler only managedservices schedule Task Specify that the CAD manages both the Web client and the scheduler managedservices schedule webclient Note The order in which these values are specified is not important Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 103 Maxcmdretries The maxcmdretries option specifies the maximum number of times the client scheduler on your workstation attempts to process a scheduled command that fails The command retry starts only if the client scheduler has not yet backed up a file never connected to the server or failed before backing up a file Use this option only when the scheduler is ru
188. ients with similar requirements for backing up and archiving data Policy domains contain one or more policy sets An administrator uses policy domains to manage a group of client nodes in a logical way For example a policy domain might include e A department such as Accounting e A physical location such as a particular building or floor e A local area network such as all clients associated with a particular file server Tivoli Storage Manager includes a default policy domain named Standard At first your client node might be associated with the default policy domain However your administrator can define additional policy domains if there are groups of users with unique backup and archive requirements A policy set is a group of one or more management classes Each policy domain can hold many policy sets The administrator uses a policy set to implement different management classes based on business and user needs Only one of these policy sets can be active at a time This is called the active policy set Each policy set contains a default management class and any number of additional management classes Using Management Classes and Copy Groups A management class is a collection of backup and archive copy groups that establishes and contains specific storage management requirements for backing up and archiving data An administrator can establish separate management classes to meet the backup and archive requirements for differen
189. ign them a management class with the Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide TE ae E aA which management classes are available to you Note If the open file has its share flag set to deny_read Tivoli Storage Manager cannot back it up Requesting Backup and Archive Services for Remote Servers You can request backup and archive services for multiple NetWare file servers To back up files on a remote NetWare file server you must either e Know the NetWare administrator password e Know the supervisor password for each server e Have a user ID and password with administrator or supervisor equivalence Tivoli Storage Manager includes two options that relate to backing up and archiving files for remote servers e nwuser Allows you to specify a user ID and password for a local or remote NetWare server You can use this option as many times as necessary in your client options file to provide password information for each remote file server for which you plan to back up and archive files If you do not store password information for local or remote servers in your client options file Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for that information when you issue commands to back up or archive files stored on those servers e nwpwfile If you choose not to include password information for a local or remote NetWare server in your client options file you can use this option to specify whether yo
190. ile This section describes how to set options in your client options file dsm opt and how to use options with commands To set an option in this file enter the option name and one or more blank spaces followed by the option value For example compression yes nodename client_a Some options consist of only the option name such as verbose and quiet You can enter the entire option name or its abbreviation For example you can specify the verbose option as either of the following verbose ve Follow these additional rules when entering options in your client options file dsm opt e Do not enter comments on the same line as an option e Indent options with spaces or tabs e Begin each comment with an asterisk as the first character in a line e Enter each option on a separate line and enter all parameters for an option on the same line e Enter one or more blank spaces between parameters e Use blank lines between options e The maximum number of characters in a file name is 256 The maximum combined length of the file name and path name is 512 characters If you update the client options file while a command line or Web client session is active you must restart the session to pick up the changes 6 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Registering Your Workstation with a Server Required Before you can use Tivoli Storage Manager you must register your client with
191. ile dsm opt Syntax gt gt HTTPport port_address gt lt Parameters port_address Specifies the TCP IP port address that is used to communicate with the Web client The range of values is 1000 through 32767 the default is 1581 Examples Options file httpport 1502 Command line httpport 1502 96 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Inclexcl The inclexcl option specifies the path and file name of an include exclude options file Place the inclexcl option in the include exclude list in your client options file Multiple inclexcl statements are permitted However you must specify this option for each include exclude file Ensure that you store your include exclude options file in a directory to which all users have read access When processing occurs the include exclude statements within the include exclude file are placed in the list position occupied by the inclexcl option in the same order and processed accordingly For more information about creating an include exclude options file see Creating Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax Parameters gt gt INCLExcl filespec gt lt filespec Specifies the path and file name of one include exclude options file Examples Options file inclexcl servera sys dsm backup excl Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Using Processing Options
192. ile instead_of prompting you for them For more information on the nwpwfile option see EN After you start an interactive session some options are valid in interactive mode and remain in effect throughout the session unless you reenter them with a different setting However most options are valid only on the initial command line To Chapter 3 Getting Started 19 file it displays an error message and stops processing In this case see your administrator to determine the name of the options file Tivoli Storage Manager should use Starting a Web Client Session You can use the Web client to perform backup archive restore and retrieve operations from workstations or platforms that support at least a JRE 1 3 1 Swing enabled browser The Web client facilitates the use of assistive devices for users with disabilities and contains improved keyboard navigation The native look and feel of the platform running the browser is preserved The Web client runs on the following browsers e Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later with the Java support option installed e Netscape Navigator 4 7 or later with Java Plug in 1 3 1 e Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later with Java Plug in 1 3 1 You can use the Web client in conjunction with Tivoli Storage Manager Web Client Agent for NetWare to provide a graphical user interface from a Web browser To run the Web Client from Netscape browsers Enable JavaScript must be checked This setting is enab
193. ile is not backed up include servera one dev includefile txt exclude servera one dev However in the following include exclude list the includefile txt file is backed up exclude servera one dev include servera one dev includefile txt 4 If you wish you can specify an include exclude file using the inclexcl option The file can be located_in any directory to which all users on your workstation have read access See for more information 5 Save the file and close it 6 Restart Tivoli Storage Manager client to enable your new client options file Using Include Exclude Options This section provides the following e Brief descriptions of the include and exclude options that you can specify in your client options file dsm opt See table references for more information about each option e A minimum include exclude list that excludes system files e A list of supported wildcard characters that you can use to include or exclude groups of files for processing 8 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide e Examples of how you might use wildcard characters with include and exclude patterns Excluding Directories Use Exclude dir statements to exclude all files and sub directories in the specified directory from processing Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates all Exclude dir statements first and removes the excluded directories and files from the list of objects available fo
194. ine optional element Syntax Diagram Description Example Abbreviations p gt gt KEYWOrd gt lt Uppercase letters denote the shortest acceptable truncation If an item appears entirely in uppercase letters it cannot be truncated You can type the item in any combination of uppercase or lowercase letters In this example you can enter KEYWO KEYWORD or KEYWOrd xii Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Syntax Diagram Description Symbols Asterisk Braces Enter these symbols exactly as they appear in Colon the syntax diagram Comma Equal Sign Hyphen 0 Parentheses Period Space Variables _ f gt gt KEYWOrd var_name gt lt Italicized lowercase items var_name denote variables In this example you can specify a var_name when you enter the KEYWORD command Repetition An arrow returning to the left means you can repeat the item r gt repeat ba A character or space within the arrow means you must separate repeated items with that character or space v A footnote by the arrow references the Be repeat ra number of times you can repeat the item 1 p gt repeat Notes 1 Specify repeat as many as 5 times Required Choices When two or more items are in a stack and 4 A pa one of them is on the line you must specify B one item Lc In this example you must choose A B or C About T
195. information about these common options filespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to query Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all the files in a directory DIRectory or NDS This parameter displays a list of backed up NDS objects To display a list of the entire directory specify directory or directory To display a list of only one container in the directory specify directory o container_name In all examples nds instead of dir may be entered Examples Task Display a list of all your backed up files on the sys volume Command dsmc q backup su y serva sys Task Display a list of all your backed up files Use the dateformat and timeformat options Command dsmc q b date 1 time 4 su y serva sys Task Display a list of files that were backed up from the serva sys proj directory with file names that begin with proj Use the dateformat and timeformat options Command dsmc q b date 1 time 4 serva sys proj proj 202 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Query Backupset The query backupset command queries a backup set from a local file or the server This command displays the backup set name generation date retention and description Syntax gt gt Query BACKUPSET gt lt options backupsetname filename Parameters options You can use these command line options with the query backupset comm
196. ing Commands Task Page iea isd isa isd able 24 provides an alphabetical list of the commands a brief description and where to locate more information Table 28 Commands Command Description Page archive Archives files from a workstation to Tivoli Storage ked Manager storage cancel restore Displays a list of restartable restore sessions and isal permits you to select one to cancel delete access Revokes authorization for a user to restore or ied retrieve files delete archive Deletes archived files from Tivoli Storage Manager kod storage delete filespace Deletes file spaces in Tivoli Storage Manager kol storage expire Inactivates backup objects you specify o2 help Displays online command help koJ incremental Backs up new and changed files foal loop Starts an interactive command session fos macro Executes commands within a macro file you fool specify query access Displays a list of current authorization rules query archive Displays a list of archived files boil query backup Displays a list of backup versions Roj query backupset Queries a backup set from the server or a local bos file query filespace Displays a list of file spaces in Tivoli Storage Boal Manager storage query inclexcl Displays a list of include exclude statements in the baal order in which they are processed during backup and archive operations Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002
197. ions file nwuser the command verifies the user ID and password in that file For more information see Syntax gt gt Query TSA gt lt options tsaname NDS _servername NDS Parameters options You can specify the nwuser option with the query tsa command This is helpful for generating a locally stored password in your nwpwfile options file when using the query tsa command in batch mode tsaname Specifies the NetWare file server TSA name you want to query Ifyou do not specify tsaname or NDS the client uses the local NetWare file server name NDS Specifies that you want to query the TSA TSANDS NLM for the Novell Directory Services NDS servername NDS Specifies that you want to query a remote TSA TSANDS NLM for the Novell Directory Services NDS which is loaded on fileserver servername Examples Task Query local file server TSA Command dsmc q tsa Task Query TSA for file server ramke Command dsmc q tsa ramke Task Query TSA for NDS Command dsmc q tsa nds Task Query TSA for NDS tsands n1m is loaded remotely on file server mock Command dsmc q tsa mock nds 210 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Task Create pwd file for file server ramke in batch mode Command dsmc q tsa ramke nwuser admin adsm viksne nwpwfile yes Task Create pwd file for file server ramke in interactive mode Command dsmc q tsa ramke nwpwfile yes Task Create pwd
198. ions of the file expire 30 days or the number of days specified in your policy domain from the day they are marked inactive For archived files if the management class to which a file is bound no longer exists and the default management class does not contain an archive copy group the archive retention grace period defined in your policy domain is used The default retention period is 60 days However your administrator can lengthen or shorten this period Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies 67 68 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 9 Using Processing Options You can use defaults for processing options or you can tailor the processing options to meet specific needs This chapter e Provides an overview of processing options e Includes an options reference section that provides detailed information about each option As a quick reference this chapter includes instructions for the following tasks Page kd al Overview of Processing Options Tivoli Storage Manager uses processing options that you specify in your client options file dsm opt to control communications backup archive processing and other types of processing This section provides an overview of the following types of options that you can enter in your client options file dsm opt e Communication options e Backup and archive processing options e Restore and retrieve
199. irtualnodename options are not specified or a virtual node name is not specified on the command line the default login ID is the name returned by the hostname command e If the nodename option is specified the name specified with the nodename option overrides the name returned by the hostname command e If the virtualnodename option is specified or a virtual node name is specified on a command line it cannot be the same name as the name returned by the hostname command When the virtual node name is accepted by the server a password is required assuming authentication is on even if the passwordaccess option is generate Once a connection to the server is established then access is permitted to any file backed up using this login ID Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt VIRTUALNodename nodename gt lt Parameters nodename Specifies a 1 to 64 character name that identifies the node for which you want to request Tivoli Storage Manager services There is no default Examples Options file virtualnodename cougar Command line virtualn banshee This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 146 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Webports The webports option enables the use of the Web client outside a firewall by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the
200. ith the incremental command dirsonly filelist filesonly incrbydate volinformation For more information You can use these common options with the incremental command changingretries domain erari HO BCEED subdir tapeprompt For information about these options see K filespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to back up Use wildcards to select a group of files all the files in a directory all objects in a directory branch or all objects in a volume You can also enter up to 20 file specifications in a command by separating the file specifications with a space If you do not specify a file specification the default domain or the domain specified as an option is backed up See Ma bn page 163 for the maximum file size for back up processing If you specify a volume all new and changed files are backed up In addition the last incremental date for the file space is updated on the server If you specify a file or directory the last incremental date is not updated This means the file or directory might be backed up again if a later backup is performed using the incrbydate option If you specify a volume specify the volume without a trailing slash filespacename Specifies the file space name on the server that contains the files you want to back up Examples Task Run an incremental backup of the default client domain specified in your client options file dsm opt Command dsmc Increment
201. ive You can use wildcards to specify groups of files or all the files in a directory You can also enter up to 20 file specifications in a command See Maximum File Size bo page 184 for the maximum file size for archive processing DIRectory or NDS Specifies that you want to archive the NDS Examples Task Archive a single file named budget Command dsmc archive t9 sys user proj1 budget Task Archive all files in the t9 sys plan projl directory that contain a file extension of txt Command dsmc archive t9 sys plan projl txt Task Archive all files in the t9 sys home directory Command dsmc archive t9 sys home Chapter 11 Using Commands 187 Cancel Restore The cancel restore command displays a list of your restartable restore sessions in the server database You can select zero or more restartable restore sessions that you want to cancel To restart restartable restore sessions use the restart restore command Use the cancel restore command when e You cannot back up files affected by the restartable restore e Restartable restore sessions lock the file space so that files cannot be moved off sequential volumes Syntax gt gt CANcel Restore gt lt L battens Parameters options Examples Task Cancel a restore operation Command dsmc cancel restore 188 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Delete Access The delete access co
202. ization 10 permits up to eight sessions with the server Multiple sessions may be used for querying the server and sending file data Multiple query sessions are used when you specify multiple file specifications with a backup or archive command For example if you enter inc filespaceA filespaceB and you specify resourceutilization 5 the client may start a second session to query files on file space B Whether or not the second session starts depends on how long it takes to query the server about files backed up on file space A The client may also try to read data from the file system and send it to the server on multiple sessions Regulating Restore Sessions When you request a restore the default is to use a maximum of one session based on how many tapes the requested data is stored on how many tape drives are available and the maximum number of mount points allowed for the node Notes 1 If all of the files are on disk only one session is used There is no multi session for a pure disk storage pool restore However if you are performing a restore in which the files reside on 4 tapes and some on disk you could use up to 5 sessions during the restore 2 The Tivoli Storage Manager server can set the maximum number of mount points a node can use on the server using the MAXNUMMP parameter For example if the data you want to restore is on 5 different tape volumes the maximum number of mount points is 5 for your node and res
203. k Task Restore a single file named budget Command dsmc restore sys u projecta budget Restore all files with a file extension of bak from the sys projecta directory Command dsmc res sys u projecta bak Restore files in the sys user project directory Use the pick and inactive options to select active and inactive backup versions Command dsmc res servb sys user project pick inactive Restore all files from the sys projecta directory that end with bak to the sys projectn directory Attention If the destination is a directory specify the delimiter as the last character of the destination If you omit the delimiter and your specified source is a directory or a file spec with a wildcard you will receive an error Command dsmc res sys projecta bak sys projectn Restore all files from the sys projecta directory that end with bak to another directory on a different NetWare server serverb sys projectn Projectn need not exist on serverb Command dsmc restore sys projecta bak serverb sys projectn Restore the NDS Command dsmc res T9 dir su y replace y Restore the o ibm organization in the NDS Command dsmc res adsm40 directory o ibm Restore files in the sys user project directory Use the pick option and the inactive option Command dsmc res servb sys user projedct pick inactive Restore files specified in the filelist to a different location Command dsmc res sys dirl dir2 restorelist txt
204. kup on the NDS and NDS volumes Displaying Information about Completed Work When you run the schedule command in the foreground your screen displays output from the scheduled commands Output is also directed to the dsmsched log file in the installation directory unless you change the directory and file name using the schedlogname option After scheduled work is performed check the schedule log to verify that all work completed successfully When a scheduled command is processed the schedule log may contain the following entry Scheduled event eventname completed successfully The client indicates whether Tivoli Storage Manager successfully issued the scheduled command associated with the eventname No attempt is made to determine the success or failure of the command You can assess the status of the command by evaluating the return code from the scheduled command in the schedule log The schedule log entry for the command s return code is prefaced with the following text Finished command Return code is Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide The schedule log continues to grow unless you prune it using the schedlogretention option See more information Enabling Disabling Scheduled Commands You can query the schedules defined by your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator by entering the following command query schedule You can use the schedcmddisabled option
205. le load dsmc restore sys subdir yes replace all tapeprompt no load dsmc restore app subdir yes replace all tapeprompt no load dsmc restore data subdir yes replace all tapeprompt no Note If you already have the appropriate values set for the subdir replace and tapeprompt options in your client options file you do not need to include those options in the commands When you issue multiple commands to restore your files you must specify a unique part of the file space in each restore command Be sure that you do not use any overlapping file specifications in the commands To display a list of the root directories in a file space use the query backup command For example load dsmc query backup lt filespace gt dirsonly subdir no As a general rule you can issue from two to four restore commands at one time The maximum number you can run at one time without degrading performance depends on factors such as how much memory you have and network utilization The speed at which Tivoli Storage Manager can restore the files also depends on how many tape drives are available and whether your administrator is using collocation to keep file spaces assigned to as few volumes as possible For example if sys user jones and sys user smith are on the same tape the restore for sys user smith must wait until the restore for sys user jones is complete However if sys user brown is on a different tape and there are at least two tape
206. le dsm opt Syntax No gt gt COMPRESSIon gt lt LYes Parameters No Files are not compressed before they are sent to the server This is the default For options with a No parameter acceptable alternatives are 0 false and off Yes Files are compressed before they are sent to the server For options with a Yes parameter acceptable alternatives are 1 true and on Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 83 Examples Options file compression yes Command line compressi no 84 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Dateformat The dateformat option specifies the format you want to use to display dates Use this option if you want to change the default date format for the language of the message repository you are using Notes 1 This dateformat option does not affect the Web client The Web client uses the date format for the locale that the browser is running in If the browser is not running in a locale that Tivoli Storage Manager supports the Web client uses the date format for American English When you change the date format and use the schedlogretention option to prune the schedule log Tivoli Storage Manager removes all entries in the schedule log with a different date format when pruning the log When you change the date format and use the errorlogretention option to prune the error log Tivoli Storage Manager removes all entries in th
207. led by default but to verify it 1 Open Netscape Navigator s Edit menu and select Preferences 2 In the Preferences dialog under Category select Advanced 3 Ensure there is a check mark next to Enable JavaScript For Microsoft Internet Explorer browsers you must enable the Scripting of Java applets This setting is also enabled by default but to verify it 1 Open the Tools menu and select Internet Options 2 From the Internet Options dialog select the Security tab 3 Click the Web content zone in which you will be using the Tivoli Storage Manager Web client and then click the Custom Level button 4 In the Security Settings dialog ensure that Enable is selected under the Scripting of Java applets setting If your browser does not have the correct level of the Java plug in the Web client will notify you and will try to automatically install the correct plug in for you e For Microsoft Internet Explorer browsers The Web client will automatically download and install the 1 3 1_01 JRE Plug in for you If a different level of the JRE exists on your workstation the 1 3 1_01 JRE is installed into a separate directory e For Netscape browsers The Tivoli Storage Manager Web client will provide the link to the web site where you can download the latest 1 3 1 plug in Netscape browsers do not support the automated plug in and JRE installation e For browsers running on HP AIX and SGI platforms Downloading the plug in and JRE re
208. lient to connect to a client across a firewall the Web client and the backup archive client must be Version 4 1 2 or later e To enable the backup archive client command line admin client and the scheduler running in polling mode to run outside a firewall the port specified by the server option tcpport default 1500 must be opened by the firewall administrator Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outside a firewall In prompted mode the Tivoli Storage Manager server needs to contact the client In order to do this some software must be installed on the Tivoli Storage Manager server to route the request through the firewall This software routes the server request through a sock port on the firewall This is typically called socksifing a system Proxies are not supported since they only route a few types of communication protocols HTTP FTP GOPHER and Tivoli Storage Manager is not one of these communication protocols that are routed It is important to note that the client creates a new connection to the Tivoli Storage Manager server when prompted This means that the firewall configuration discussed above must be in place e The server cannot log events to a Tivoli Enterprise Console server across a firewall Accessing the NetWare Server Tivoli Storage Manager requires two connections to the NetWare server for normal operations These two connections do not count against the license
209. ling Backup and Archive Processing Option Description Page Backup Processing exclude These options are equivalent Use these options to exclude bal exclude backup a file or group of files from backup services exclude file exclude file backup include These options are equivalent Use these options to include 28 include backup files or assign management classes for backup include file processing Archive Processing exclude archive Excludes a file or group of files from archive services bal include These options are equivalent Use these options to include bal include archive files or assign management classes for archive processing Chapter 2 Configuring IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 9 Controlling Compression and Encryption Processing After Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates Exclude dir and any other include exclude options controlling backup archive image and system objects it uses the following options to determine which files undergo compression encryption or subfile processing Table 6 Options for Controlling Compression and Encryption Processing Option Description Page Compression Processing exclude compression Excludes files from compression processing if bal compression yes is specified This option applies to backups and archives include compression Includes files for compression processing if compression yes is specified This option applies to backups and archives Encryption
210. lude statement in your client options file Management class names are not case sensitive For example to associate all the files in the costs directory with a management class named budget you would enter include sys adsm proj2 costs budget To specify a management class named managall to use for all files to which you do not explicitly assign a management class you would enter include managall The example below demonstrates how to use a management class exclude sno include nw5 sys winter ice mcweekly include nw5 sys winter december ice mcdaily include nw5 sys winter january ice mcmonthly include nw5 sys winter winter white sno Processing follows these steps 1 The file named white sno is backed up following bottom up processing rules Because you did not specify a management class the file is assigned to the default management class 64 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide 2 Any file with an extension of ice in the nw5 sys winter january directory is assigned to the management class mcmonthly 3 Any file with an extension of ice in the nw5 sys winter december directory is assigned to the management class mcdaily 4 Any other files with an extension of ice in any directory under nw5 sys winter are assigned to the management class mcweekly 5 Any file with an extension of sno except nw5 sys winter winter white sno in any directory
211. lways 82 compression 83 dateformat 85 deletefiles 154 description 155 detail 156 dirmc 86 dirsonly 157 domain 87 editor 89 encryptkey 90 errorlogname 91 errorlogretention 92 exclude exclude archive 8 93 exclude backup 8 93 exclude compression 8 93 exclude dir 8 93 exclude encrypt 93 exclude file 8 93 exclude file backup 8 93 wildcard characters 10 12 filelist 158 filesonly 160 format and language summary 73 fromdate 161 fromnode 162 fromtime 163 httpport 96 ifnewer 164 inactive 165 inclexcl 97 include 98 management class specifying 64 wildcard characters 10 12 include archive 98 include backup 98 include compression 98 include encrypt 98 include file 98 incrbydate 166 language 100 largecommbuffers 101 latest 167 location 168 managedservices 102 maxcmdretries 104 memoryefficientbackup 105 nodename 106 noprompt 169 numberformat 107 nwignorecompressbit 108 nwpwfile 109 256 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide options continued nwuser 110 nwwaitonerror 112 optfile 170 overriding the client options file 149 password 113 passwordaccess 114 passworddir 116 pick 171 pitdate 172 pittime 173 postnschedulecmd 117 postschedulecmd 117 prenschedulecmd 118 preschedulecmd 118 preservepath 174 processorutilization 119 queryschedperiod 120 quiet 121 replace 122 resourceutilization 123 restore and retrieve summary 72 retryperiod 125 revokeremoteaccess
212. mands are specified on the command line Contrast with graphical user interface communication method The method by which a client and server exchange information For Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive clients the method can be TCP IP See Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol communication protocol A set of defined interfaces that permits computers to communicate with each other copy group A policy object that contains attributes that control backup and archive file e Generation e Destination e Expiration Backup and archive copy groups belong to management classes See frequency destination mode retention serialization and version D default management class A management class assigned to a policy set This class is used to govern backed up or archived files when a user does not explicitly associate a file with a specific management class through the include exclude list destination A copy group attribute that specifies the storage pool in which to back up or archive a file At installation Tivoli Storage Manager provides two storage destinations named backuppool and archivepool domain See policy domain or client domain drag Move the mouse while holding down the mouse button thus moving the selected object drag and drop Move drag an object on top of another object and release the mouse button thus relocating the object dsm opt file See options file Also called client options file dynam
213. mc set access archive sys devel proja sys node 3 Task Give node_3 the authority to retrieve all files in the sys u devel proja directory Command dsmc set a archive sys u devel proja node 3 Task Give all nodes whose names end with bldgb the authority to restore all of your backed up files Command dsmc set a b bldgb Task Give node3 authority to restore all your backed up files Command dsmc set access b node3 224 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Set Password The set password command changes the Tivoli Storage Manager password for your workstation If you omit the old and new passwords when you enter the set password command you are prompted once for the old password and twice for the new password A password is not case sensitive and it can be as many as 63 characters Valid characters are a z Any letter a through z upper or lower case 0 9 Any number 0 through 9 Plus Period Underscore Hyphen amp Ampersand Syntax gt gt SET Password rA oldpw eee E PE Parameters oldpw Specifies the current password for your workstation newpw Specifies the new password for your workstation options Select any valid common option For more information see Chapter 9 Usingl Examples The following is an example of using the set password command Task Change your password from osecret to nsecret Command dsmc set pas
214. me you run an incremental backup against it This attribute is not checked for selective backups For archive copy groups copy frequency is always CMD command There is no restriction on how often you archive a file Versions Data Exists The Versions Data Exists attribute specifies the maximum number of different backup versions retained for files and directories currently on your file system If you select a management class that permits more than one backup version the most recent version is called the active version All other versions are called inactive versions If the maximum number of versions permitted is five and you run a backup that creates a sixth version the oldest version is deleted from server storage Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies 61 Versions Data Deleted The Versions Data Deleted attribute specifies the maximum number of different backup versions retained for files and directories that you erased from your file system This parameter is ignored as long as the file or directory remains in your file system If you erase the file or directory the next time you run an incremental backup the active backup version is changed to inactive and the oldest versions are erased that exceed the number specified by this parameter The expiration date for the remaining versions is based on the retain extra versions and retain only version parameters Retain Extra Versions The Retain Extra Versions at
215. mmand See LQ 05 for more information The client program processes the include and exclude options as follows 1 Files are checked directories are only checked if the exclude dir option is specified 2 File names are compared to the include exclude list from the bottom up When a match is found the processing stops and checks whether the option is include or exclude If the option is include the file is backed up If the option is exclude the file is not backed up 3 Ifa match is not found files listed are implicitly included and backed up 4 If policy administration is in effect files are backed up according to the default management class or the management class you specify on a matching include option The following examples demonstrate bottom up processing Example 1 Assume that servera data is defined as the domain and that you defined the following statements for the exclude and include options Note In a NetWare environment if you do not specify a server name the client program uses the local server name exclude servera obj include servera data foo obj exclude servera data foo junk obj The current file being processed is servera data foo dev test obj Processing follows these steps 1 Rule 3 the last include or exclude statement defined is checked first because of bottom up processing The file servera data foo junk obj does not match the current file name that is being processed
216. mmand dsmc schedule password notel 1 When you run the schedule command all messages regarding scheduled work are sent to a file called dsmsched 1og or to an alternate file you specify with the schedlogname option in your client options file dsm opt If you do not specify a directory path with the file name in the schedlogname option the dsmsched 1og file will reside in the default installation directory 220 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Selective The selective command backs up files that you specify If these files become damaged or lost you can replace them with backup versions from the NetWare server When you run a selective backup all the files are candidates for back up unless they are excluded from backup in your include exclude list or they do not meet management class requirements for serialization You can selectively back up single files and directories from the NetWare server You can also selectively back up the NDS Use wildcard characters to back up groups of related files During a selective backup copies of the files are sent to the server even if they did not change since the last backup This might result in more than one copy of the same file on the server If this occurs you might not have as many different down level versions of the file on the server as you intended Your version limit might consist of identical files To avoid this use the incremen
217. mmand deletes authorization rules for files that are stored on the server When you delete an authorization rule you revoke user access to any files specified by that rule Syntax gt gt Delete ACcess a ations Parameters options For information about common options that you can use with this command Examples Task Display a list of current authorization rules and select the rules you want to delete Command dsmc delete access See the following screen example Index Type Node User Path 1 Backup nodel mo sys u dev proja list 2 Backup node4 mo sys u plan exp deptc 4 Archive node5 mo sys u mfg inv parta Enter Index of rule s to delete or quit to cancel To delete the authorization rules that allow node4 and node5 to access your files type 2 4 or 2 4 your selections can be separated by commas or spaces Then press Enter Quit without making a selection by entering quit Chapter 11 Using Commands 189 Delete Archive The delete archive command deletes archived files from server storage Your administrator must give you authority to delete archived files Attention When you delete archived files you cannot retrieve them Verify that the files are obsolete before you delete them Syntax v Delete ARchive 7 filespec al gt lt options DIRectory or NDS Parameters options You can use these command line options with the delete archive command
218. mmands 217 Retrieve The retrieve command obtains copies of archived files from the Tivoli Storage Manager server You can retrieve specific files or entire directories Use the description option to specify the descriptions assigned to the files you want to retrieve You can also use the pick option to display a list of your archives From this list you can select an archive to retrieve Retrieve the files into the same directory from which they were archived or in a different directory Tivoli Storage Manager uses the preservepath option with the subtree value as the default for restoring files For more information see Note If you are retrieving files to a different directory than the original directory file names become the names you specify with the destinationfilespec parameter Because only DOS names are valid within the client the file name becomes a DOS name Syntax gt gt RETrieve gt lt 7 sourcefilespec options DIRectory or NDS destinerionviiesnee Parameters options You can use these command line options with the retrieve command description dirsonly filelist filesonly fromdate fromnode fromtime ifnewer pick pitdate preservepath todate totime For more information see command see sourcefilespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to retrieve Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all the files in a directory S
219. n Command ret sys project pick Chapter 11 Using Commands 219 Schedule The schedule command starts the client scheduler on your workstation The client scheduler must be running before scheduled work can start If the schedmode option is set to polling when you start the client scheduler it continuously contacts the server for scheduled events based on the time you specified with the queryschedperiod option in your client options file dsm opt If your administrator sets the queryschedperiod option for all nodes that setting overrides your setting If you are using TCP IP communications the server can prompt your workstation when it is time to run a scheduled event To do so set the schedmode option to prompted in the client options file dsm opt or on the schedule command Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the client scheduler running in prompted mode across a firewall Use the client scheduler in polling mode across a firewall After you start the client scheduler it continues to run and to start scheduled events To end the scheduler enter QQ If the scheduler is active it completes necessary transactions then stops Syntax gt gt SCHedule gt lt ptio Parameters options You can use these common options maxcmdretries password queryschedperiod retryperiod schedlogname schedmode and tcpclientport See 9J for more information Examples Task Start the client scheduler Co
220. n be either a storage pool of disk devices or a storage pool of devices that support removable media such as tape Retain Versions Specifies the number of days an archived file remains in storage When the specified number of days elapse for an archived copy of a file it is deleted from server storage Selecting a Management Class for Files If the default management class meets the backup and archive requirements for all the files on your workstation it is not necessary to take any action to associate your files with that management class This is done automatically when you back up or archive your files Note If you do not assign a management class to the NDS the default management class is used When selecting a different management class for your files consider these questions Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies 63 e Does the management class contain a backup copy group If you attempt to back up a file associated with a management class that does not contain a backup copy group the file is not backed up e Does the management class contain an archive copy group If you attempt to archive a file associated with a management class that does not contain an archive copy group the file is not archived e Does the backup copy group contain attributes that back up your files often enough Mode and frequency work together to control how often a file is backed up when you use incremental backup Tivoli
221. n Title Order Number Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Quick Start GC32 0770 Tivoli Storage Manager for HP UX Quick Start GC32 0774 Tivoli Storage Manager for OS 390 and z OS Quick Start GC32 0777 Tivoli Storage Manager for Sun Solaris Quick Start GC32 0780 Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Quick Start GC32 0784 Chapter 1 Installing IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 3 4 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 2 Configuring IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Attention For current configuration information for the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager program product refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media After installation required configuration tasks include the following Page Optional configuration tasks include the following Task Page Updating AUTOEXEC NCF Required After the installation program completes use a text editor to add the following entry to your NetWare server s autoexec ncf file search add VOLUME INSTALL_DIRECTORY where VOLUME INSTALL_DIRECTORY is the destination you specified for the installation files Creating and Modifying the Client Options File Required During installation Tivoli Storage Manager provides a sample client option file called dsm smp This file is a template containing options required to establish client server communications By default Tivoli Storage Manager pl
222. nactive version 42 45 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 backing up files continued include exclude list 35 open file 38 partial incremental backup 36 related topics 40 restore 41 selective backup 40 command 36 backup allocated memory required for processing UNIX restrictions 31 binding management classes to files 66 copy mode 63 displaying processing status 36 files with long names 28 files management class 64 full incremental using Web client GUI 37 fuzzy 63 grace period retention 60 inactivate a list of files 192 incremental restrictions for directories 30 incremental backup by date using Web client GUI 37 incremental by date 31 restrictions for directories 31 managing 59 maximum file size 185 new and changed files 29 new or changed files 28 overview 28 performance comparison between incremental and incremental by date 31 purpose 28 saving encryption key password 90 selective 31 using Web client GUI 37 sorting file list 24 using multiple sessions 36 using the Web client 20 backup copy group 60 attributes 60 backup set enabling GUI for local restore 46 restore 46 backup archive client overview 1 batch mode 182 starting a session 18 bottom up processing include exclude list 12 C cancel restore command 188 central scheduling summary of options 72 changingretries option 78 client registering with server 7 setting password 7 client acceptor daemon use to manage scheduler 102 use to manage scheduler
223. nager deletes the oldest inactive version 42 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Normally you want to restore active backup versions of files However there might be times when you want to restore an inactive version For example you might want to restore a file with the contents it contained on or before a specific date Or you might accidentally erase a file and then run an incremental backup The active backup version of the file is now inactive To get your file back you need to restore the most recent inactive backup version of the file The restore command restores only active backup versions of files unless you use the following options e latest Causes Tivoli Storage Manager to restore the latest backup version of a file regardless of whether it is active or inactive e pick and inactive Causes Tivoli Storage Manager to display a list of both active and inactive backup versions of files From that list you can choose the versions you want to restore For example if you want to restore the latest version of the deleted file sys h1 doc use load dsmc restore sys hl doc latest If you try to restore both an active and inactive version of a file at the same time only the active version is restored You can restore a file to either its original location or to a different location For example to restore the sys doc h1 doc file to its original directory use load
224. nd provides the server with details about file spaces directories and files 2 The server sorts the data using an internal sort table which minimizes tape mounts 3 The data to be restored is sent to the client File and directory objects stored on disk are sent immediately since sorting for such data is not required before restoring it For more information on using the command line to begin restartable restores see n page 214 For help with performing restartable restores using a GUI follow these steps 1 Click Help from the Restore window 2 Click Restoring Backup Versions 3 Click Work with restartable restore sessions Performing a Command Line Restore Do You Want To Restore an Active or Inactive Backup Your administrator determines how many backup versions Tivoli Storage Manager maintains for each file on your NetWare server Frequently the administrator maintains more than one version of each file Having multiple versions of a file allows you to restore older versions in case the most recent backup is damaged Tivoli Storage Manager considers the most recent backup version to be the active version Any other backup version is considered an inactive version Every time Tivoli Storage Manager backs up your files it marks the new backup version as the active backup and it changes what used to be the active backup to an inactive backup When the maximum number of inactive versions is reached Tivoli Storage Ma
225. network connection benefits from compression but a slow processor on a fast network connection does not Note The client will not compress files that the NetWare operating system already compresses If you set the compression option to yes and Tivoli Storage Manager finds a file that the NetWare operating system already compresses the file is sent to the server without further compression The file is sent as a NetWare compressed file If you set the compressalways option to yes compression continues even if the file size increases To stop compression if the file size grows and resend the file uncompressed set the compressalways option to No If you set the compression option to yes you can control compression processing in the following ways e Use the exclude compression option in your client options file dsm opt to exclude specific files or groups of files from compression processing See j for more information e Use the include compression option in your client options file dsm opt to include files within a broad group of excluded files for compression processing for more information This option controls compression only if your administrator specifies that your client node can compress files before sending them to the server Use the compression option with the archive incremental and selective commands Note The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options fi
226. ngs check box For UNIX 1 Change directory to the installation directory of your JRE and then change directory to the bin directory 2 Run the JavaPluginControlPanel executable and click the Proxies tab 3 Uncheck Use browser settings e Change your browser settings to enable a direct connection to the Internet For Netscape Navigator Open the Edit menu and select Preferences Under Category expand the Advanced section select Proxies and click Direct connection to the Internet For Internet Explorer Open the Tools menu and select Internet Options Select the Connections tab and click the LAN Settings button Uncheck the Use a proxy server check box Additional information about running Swing applets can be found in the Sun s Java Tutorial http java sun com docs books tutorial uiswing start swingApplet html You can back up and restore your own data or an administrator can centralize the backup or restore operations of many clients To use the Web client specify the URL of the client workstation running the Web client in your Web browser You also need to specify the local host port number the default is 1581 The Web client is supported when used in conjunction with a Tivoli Storage Manager server that is Version 3 or higher Note Entering a different URL or pressing the browser Back button during an operation disconnects the Web client and causes the current operation to end Chapter 3 Getting Star
227. nning Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Your administrator can also set this option If your administrator specifies a value for this option that value overrides what you specify in the client options file after your client node successfully contacts the server Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt MAXCMDRetries maxcmdretries gt lt Parameters maxcmdretries Specifies the number of times the client scheduler can attempt to process a scheduled command that fails The range of values is zero through 9999 the default is 2 Examples Options file maxcmdr 4 Command line maxcmdretries 3 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 104 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Memoryefficientbackup The memoryefficientbackup option specifies a memory conserving algorithm for processing incremental backups that backs up one directory at a time using less memory Use this option with the incremental command when your workstation is memory constrained Note The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No gt gt MEMORYEF fici entbackup f a Ie Yes Parameters No Your client node uses the faster more memory intensive method when proces
228. not encrypt the user ID and password in the TSM PWD file Each time you send a command to back up or archive files stored on a remote NetWare server you are prompted for the user ID and password for the server Examples Options file nwpwf yes Command line nwpwfile no This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 109 Nwuser The nwuser option specifies a user ID and password to connect to a local or remote NetWare server The user must have NetWare supervisor authority Use this option in your client options file for each NetWare server If you do not use this option you are prompted for a user ID and password for each target service when you start a backup or archive operation When logging into a NetWare server from Tivoli Storage Manager enter one of the following e A typeful full distinguished name e A bindery emulation name used in proper context For example if you received the following message Please enter NetWare user for ELLAS You can specify either CN Zorba 0U Islands 0 Greece or Zorba if the Bindery Context is set to OU Islands 0 Greece Tivoli Storage Manager rejects the typeless name Zorba Islands Greece Note Bindery context does not affect Tivoli Storage Manager NDS processing it is not necessary to specify it Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax p gt gt
229. ntal 194 interactive loop mode 183 loop 198 macro 199 number of files specifications permitted 184 query access 200 query archive 201 query backup 202 query backupset 203 query filespace 204 query inclexcl 205 query mgmtclass 206 query restore 207 query schedule 208 query session 209 query TSA 210 recall previous 185 restart restore 213 restore 214 restore backupset 216 retrieve 218 schedule 220 scheduled enabling or disabling 57 selective 221 set access 223 set password 225 using in executables 53 using options with 75 commmethod option 79 commrestartduration option 80 commrestartinterval option 81 communication methods summary 69 TCP IP NetWare client 2 V4 2 changes 1 communications establishing through firewall 23 compressalways option 82 compression option 83 compression processing 83 93 98 configuring Tivoli Storage Manager optional tasks 5 required tasks 5 connections number 24 copy destination attribute 63 copy frequency attribute 61 copy group name attribute 61 copy groups 59 archive 60 backup 60 copy mode attribute absolute 63 modified 63 copy serialization attribute 62 copy type attribute 61 D dateformat option 85 default management class 59 policy domain 59 delete access command 189 deletefiles option 154 deleting archived files 51 file spaces 48 description option 155 detail option 156 directories restrictions on excluding from incremental backup 29 restrictions on excl
230. ntal backup 2 The server can define exclude options with the inclexcl option Exclude any system files that could corrupt the operating system when recovered You should also exclude the client directory containing the client files Use wildcard characters to exclude a broad range of files See Including and a Q for a list of wildcard characters that you can use Then if necessary use the include option to make exceptions To exclude an entire directory called any test enter the following exclude dir nw2 sys any test To exclude subdirectories that begin with test under the any directory enter the following exclude dir nw2 sys any test Wildcards are not supported for the server name or volume name If you do not specify a server name Tivoli Storage Manager uses the local server name Attention See should always exclude Q for a list of files that you Compression Processing If you want to exclude specific files or groups of files from compression processing during a backup or archive operation consider the following e You must set the compression option to yes to enable compression processing If you do not specify the compression option or you set the compression option to no Tivoli Storage Manager does not perform compression processing See for more information If you set the compression option to yes and no exclude compression statements exist Tivoli Storage Manager considers all files for compres
231. ntal command it processes these volumes in addition to those you specify in your default client domain DIRectory or NDS Specifies the NDS The NDS is not included in the all local domain To include the NDS add the directory to the domain entry Examples Options file domain sys tsm nds Command line domain servera sys serverb sys Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Editor The editor option turns the command line interface CLI editor and retrieve capability on or off If the editor and command retrieve functions are not working on a specific workstation setting we recommend that you turn off this function Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax Yes gt gt Editor Parameters Yes Turns on the CLI editor and command retrieve capability This is the default LNo No Turns off the CLI editor and command retrieve capability Examples Options file editor yes Command line editor yes This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 89 Encryptkey The encryptkey option specifies whether to save the encryption key password locally when performing a backup archive operation or whether to prompt for the encryption key password The encryption key password is saved to the TSM PWD file in encrypte
232. o the directory where Tivoli Storage Manager components are installed You can display online startup information product manuals and readmes On a Web browser 1 Click File and then click Open File 2 Select the CD ROM drive 3 Select the START HTM file AARG from CD ROM Mount the client CD ROM 2 Load the NetWare Server Installation routine NWconfig NLM for NetWare 5 1 and 6 0 You can use RCONSOLE 3 Select Product Options and press Enter 4 Select Install a product not listed and press Enter 5 Press F3 to specify Volume TSMCLI NTW where Volume is the volume name of the mounted CD ROM 6 Select the components you wish to install Follow the instructions on the screen 7 Press F10 to start the installation Notes 1 If you attempt to use NWconfig NLM to remove the components product records are deleted from the database Product files are not deleted To delete the product files use the NetWare Administrator utility or the PURGE command line utility Tivoli Storage Manager Server Installation and Configuration The Tivoli Storage Manager clients work in conjunction with the Tivoli Storage Manager server Contact your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator to obtain client access to the Tivoli Storage Manager server or refer to the following publications to install and configure a Tivoli Storage Manager server Table 3 Tivoli Storage Manager Server Quick Start Publications Publicatio
233. ocation and name of the file that contains the list of files to process with the command Note When you specify the filelist option on the command line you cannot use the subdir option Examples Command line dsmc sel filelist serva sys avi filelist txt Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 159 Filesonly The filesonly option restricts backup and restore processing to files only You cannot restore or retrieve directories from the server when using the filesonly option with the restore or retrieve commands However directories with default attributes are created if required as placeholders for files that you restore or retrieve Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt F ILESOnly gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc incremental filesonly sys 160 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Fromdate The fromdate option specifies a date from which you want to search for backed up or archived files Files that were backed up or archived before this date are not included although older directories might be included if necessary to restore or retrieve the files Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt FROMDate date gt lt Parameters date Specifies the date from which you want to searc
234. ode not your specific machine Your Tivoli Storage Manager password protects your data To restore or retrieve files to another NetWare server use the nodename option to specify the node name of the NetWare server from which you backed up or archived the files You can either use the nodename option when starting Tivoli Storage Manager or update the client options file on the NetWare server If you are using someone else s machine you can avoid changing their configuration by using the nodename option on the load dsmc command Chapter 5 Restoring Your Data 47 For example enter the following load dsmc res nodename nwl serva sys home proj servb sys home proj where nw1 is the node name for the NetWare server from which you backed up the files serva sys home proj identifies the server and the files you want to restore and servb sys home proj indicates where you want to place the files you are restoring You must specify a destination or Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to restore the files to the node from which the files were backed up You can enter the password option with the restore or retrieve command or allow Tivoli Storage Manager to prompt you for the password for the client node you specified with the nodename option Restoring a Disk In Case of Disk Loss Tivoli Storage Manager can only recover your files if you can run the client If the disk that contains the client is lost you must reinstall the client before yo
235. oes not match the configured nodename the client attempts to authenticate the user ID as an administrative user ID To use an administrative user ID with any of the backup archive clients the user ID must have one of the following authorities e System privilege Authority over the entire system e Policy privilege Authority over the node s domain e Client owner Authority over the configured nodename With client owner authority you own the data and have physical access to it To use the Web Client you need to have an administrative user ID with client access authority over the configured nodename From the Web Client you can back up and restore files on the client machine you are remotely accessing However you cannot use a remote Web Client to restore files to your local machine With client access authority you do not have physical access to the data If you want access to the Web Client for your own use but wish to prevent administrators with client access authority from accessing your machine remotely specify the revokeremoteaccess option in your options file See 4 for more information Client access authority is not sufficient to access the backup archive client and command line client You must possess at least client owner authority You can use the virtualnodename option to temporarily access your node s data from another machine This option differs from the nodename option in that if passwordaccess generate i
236. olume using the NWCONFIG NLM utility At the server console type load nwconfig and create a NetWare partition on the new disk thus redefining the volume to NetWare NetWare will re place the Volume object in the NDS tree Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare Backup and Recovery Guide 235 Note Ensure that utilities such as DSREPAIR NLM or DSMAINT NLM are not running when you load NWCONFIG NLM to ensure that the Volume object is re placed in the NDS properly 4 Remount the volume using NWCONFIG NLM 5 Load the necessary SMS target service agents At the target NetWare server console type load tsands load tsa500 NetWare 5 or load tsa600 NetWare 6 6 Restore the volume s using Tivoli Storage Manager Enter the following NetWare console command for each volume you want to restore load dsmc restore voll subdir yes replace all volinfo Where voll is the name of the failed volume Example 2 Loss of a SYS Volume or Entire Server Since NDS information is stored on the SYS volume the loss of the SYS volume may require the restoration of all or part of the NDS depending on the availability of replicas in addition to the file system data including trustee rights Three different examples are presented e Single server network e Multiple server network replica present e Multiple server network replica not present Note that in all cases the NetWare OS and the NDS must be reinstalled to the server before proceedin
237. om using a command on both options If your administrator uses a blank or null string on the preschedulecmd option you cannot run a pre schedule command If the command string contains blanks enclose the command string in double quotes If you placed double quotes within the command string then enclose the entire command string in single quotes Examples Options file preschedulecmd lt insert your database product s quiesce command here gt database The command string is a valid command for quiescing your database Command line Does not apply 118 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Processorutilization The processorutilization option specifies the amount of CPU time assigned to the client program Because this option can affect other applications on your client node use it only when speed is a high priority Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt PROCESSORutilization number gt lt Parameters number Specifies the amount of time the client program will control the CPU in hundredths of a second before giving it to another application For example if the number is 1000 the client program controls the CPU for 10 seconds The minimum value is zero There is no maximum value The default is zero Examples Options file proce
238. ome NDS objects have attributes which are references to other objects These object references are stored as full distinguished names An example is an alias which can reference a User or Group object During the restore of an object the object being restored may reference an object that does not currently exist In this case a place holder object is created to satisfy the object reference These place holders are eventually replaced by the real objects in the restore process During partial restores of the NDS it is possible that the place holder object is not specified for restore In this case the place holder object will remain in the tree appearing as an object of type unknown These unknown objects can be handled by either deleting the unknown object or selectively restoring the real object Tivoli Storage Manager also treats place holders as existing objects As a result we recommend that you specify the replace yes option during all NDS restorations even if you are restoring the NDS from scratch In general be careful with partial restores of the NDS The current SMS architecture may not be robust enough to provide a partial restore depending on the number and extent of object references in the NDS tree The unknown objects are created and left in the tree if referenced objects are not selected for the restore or if you specify the replace no option during the restore Server Centric IDs Server centric ids are unique ids a
239. ome files that are open exclusively to an application that applications such as Tivoli Storage Manager cannot read for back up regardless of the policy settings on the server which dictate taking fuzzy copies of open files Files that are opened exclusively by other applications should be considered for exclusion from backup If certain files are not backed up because they are open or they get changed when Tivoli Storage Manager backs them up consider the following e If the file is unimportant or can be easily rebuilt for example a temporary file you might not care that the file is not backed up e If the file is important Close the file before Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to back it up If backups are run according to a schedule use the preschedule option to issue a command that closes the file before the backup occurs For example if the open file is a database use the database s shutdown command to shut down the database You can use the postschedule option to restart the application that uses the file after the backup completes If you are not using a schedule for the backup ensure that you close the application that uses the file before you start the backup Tivoli Storage Manager can back up the file even if it is open and gets changed during the backup This type of backup can be acceptable if it does not matter that the content of the file changes while the file is being backed up To back up these files ass
240. ommand dsmc query inclexcl Task Test the validity of this pattern x 1log Command dsmc query inclexcl sys x log Chapter 11 Using Commands 205 Query Mgmtclass The query mgmtclass command displays information about the management classes available in your active policy set Your administrator defines management classes that contain attributes controlling whether a file is eligible for backup or archive services Management classes also determine how backups and archives are managed on the server Your active policy set contains a default management class it can contain any number of additional management classes You can assign specific management classes to files using include options that are located in the client options file dsm opt If you do not assign a management class to a file Tivoli Storage Manager uses the default management class When you archive files you can override the assigned management class by using the archmc option Syntax gt gt Query Mgmtclass gt lt aptteis Parameters options You can use the detail and fromnode command line options with the Examples Task Display default and available management classes Command dsmc query mgmtclass det 206 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Query Restore The query restore command displays a list of your restartable restore sessions in the server dat
241. omplete before it starts the schedule Notes 1 Successful completion of the preschedulecmd command is considered to be a prerequisite to running the scheduled operation If the preschedulecmd command does not complete with return code 0 the scheduled operation and any postschedulecmd and postnschedulecmd commands will not run The client will report that the scheduled event failed and the return code will be 12 If you do not want the preschedulecmd command to be governed by this rule you can create a script or batch file that invokes the command and exits with return code 0 Then configure preschedulecmd to invoke the script or batch file The return code for the preschedulecmd command is not tracked and does not influence the return code of the scheduled event 2 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 3 The server can also define the preschedulecmd option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt PRESchedulecmd cmdstring gt lt Parameters cmdstring Specifies the command to process Use only one preschedulecmd option You can enter a command to be executed before a schedule using this option Use a blank or null string for cmdstring if you want to prevent any commands from running that the administrator uses for postschedulecmd and preschedulecmd If you specify a blank or null string on either option it prevents the administrator fr
242. on s option file Values for the webports are required If you do not specify the values for the webports option the default zero 0 causes TCP IP to randomly assign two free port numbers See for more information about the webports option To use the administrative Web interface for a server across a firewall you must open the port that is the HTTP port for the server using the httpport option in the server options file The default HTTP port is 1580 In an enterprise environment we strongly recommend that you use the Tivoli Storage Manager Secure Web Administrator Proxy for Web administration of the Tivoli Storage Manager server Install the proxy on a Web server that sits on the firewall so that the Web server can access resources on both sides of the firewall this is sometimes called the demilitarized zone When you set up the proxy you can use it to administer any Tivoli Storage Manager server at Version 3 7 or higher For more information on how to install and use the proxy see the appendix about Chapter 3 Getting Started 23 the Web proxy in the Tivoli Storage Manager Quick Start manual You can also increase security in this environment by enabling HTTPS services also called secure socket layer or SSL on the Web server where you install the proxy Check your Web server documentation for information on how to set this up When using Tivoli Storage Manager across a firewall please consider the following e To use the Web c
243. on does not disable the preschedulecmd and postschedulecmd commands However you can specify preschedulecmd or postschedulecmd with a blank or a null string to disable the scheduling of these commands Commands scheduled by the server using the action command option on the define schedule server command may also be disabled in the same way Use the query schedule command to query the schedules defined by your administrator See Que for more information Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No SCHEDCMDDisabled ra Yes Parameters Yes Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager disables the scheduling of commands by the server using the action command option on the define schedule server command No Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager does not disable the scheduling of commands by the server using the action command option on the define schedule server command This is the default Examples Options file schedcmddisabled no Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 127 Schedlogname The schedlogname option specifies the path and file name where you want to store schedule log information Use this option only when the scheduler is running When you run the schedule command output from scheduled commands is di
244. on failure occurs The range of values is zero through 65535 the default is 15 Examples Options file commrestartinterval 30 Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 81 Compressalways The compressalways option specifies whether to continue compressing an object if it grows during compression or resend the object uncompressed Use this option with the compression option Use the compressalways option with the archive incremental and selective commands Note The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax cae gt gt COMPRESSAIways gt lt Parameters Yes File compression continues even if the file grows as a result of compression This is the default No Backup archive client objects are resent uncompressed if they grow during compression API behavior depends on the application Application backups may fail Examples Options file compressalways yes Command line compressa no This option is valid only on the initial command line 82 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Compression The compression option compresses files before you send them to the server Compressing your files reduces data storage for backup versions and archive copies of your files It can however affect Tivoli Storage Manager throughput A fast processor on a slow
245. on option with the query schedule command See Da a age 89 for more information Examples Task Display your scheduled events Command dsmc query schedule 208 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Query Session The query session command displays information about your session including the current node name when the session was established server information and server connection information Syntax gt gt Query SEssion aione Parameters options For information about common options you can use with the query session command see k Examples Task Display your session information Command dsmc query session Chapter 11 Using Commands 209 Query TSA The query tsa command displays information associated with a specific NetWare Target Service Agent TSA This information includes the TSA name type version information and location of the password file for the TSA if applicable This command also verifies the user ID and password information depending on how they are stored If the user ID and password are stored locally using the nwpwfile option and the current password file does not contain valid information this command prompts for the correct information This command also prompts for the correction_information if a current password files does not exist For more information see Nwpw If the password is stored in the local opt
246. on options that you can use with this command Examples Task Display a list of help choices Command dsmc help Chapter 11 Using Commands 193 Incremental The incremental command backs up all new or changed files or directories in the default client domain or from NetWare volumes you specify unless you exclude them from backup services Tivoli Storage Manager also backs up file system trustee rights along with file data It is not possible to restore only the trustee rights they are restored as part of the file restore process You can incrementally back up an entire file space domain or just a single file If you specify only the file space name the entire directory tree is traversed If you specify a directory only that directory is backed up unless you set the subdir option to yes This is considered a partial incremental back up The following attributes in the management class assigned to the file or directory affect whether the data is actually backed up Frequency The number of days that must elapse between successive backups for the file Use this attribute during a full incremental backup Mode Permits you to back up only files that changed since the last backup modified Also permits you to back up the files whether they changed or not absolute Serialization Permits or denies backup of files or directories according to the following values e static In order to be backed up data must not be modified d
247. on with all query commands except the following e query mgmtclass e query schedule e query session e query inclexcl e query tsa Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt SCROLLLines number gt lt Parameters number Specifies the number of lines of information that display on your screen at one time The range of values is 1 through 80 the default is 20 Examples Options file scrolllines 25 Command line scrol11 25 This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode 132 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Scrollprompt The scrollprompt option specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to stop and wait after displaying the number of lines of information you specified with the scrolllines option or scroll through and stop at the end of the information list Use the scrollprompt option with all query commands except the following e query mgmtclass e query schedule e query session e query inclexcl e query tsa Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No r gt scRL Prompt ff Ie Yes
248. ons are arranged in alphabetical order Information for each option includes e A description of the option e A syntax diagram of the option The option name is shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase characters The uppercase characters indicate the minimum abbreviation you can use for the option name See for an explanation of these diagrams e Detailed descriptions of the option parameters If the parameter is a constant a value that does not change the minimum abbreviation is shown in uppercase letters e Examples of using the option on the command line 152 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Archmc The archmc option specifies the available management class for your policy domain to which you want to bind your archived files Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt ARCHMc managementclass gt lt Parameters managementclass Specifies an available management class in the active policy set of your policy domain This management class overrides the default management class for the files you are archiving Examples Command line dsmc archive archmc ret2yrs t3 sys plan projl budget jan Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 153 Deletefiles Use the deletefiles option with the archive command to delete files from your workstation after you archive them Note The Tivoli Storage M
249. or more information Examples Task Display your file spaces Command dsmc query filespace Task Display your file spaces Use the dateformat and timeformat options to reformat the dates and times Command dsmc query filespace date 5 time 4 204 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Query Inclexcl The query inclexcl command displays a list of include exclude statements in the order in which they are processed during backup and archive operations The list displays the type of option the scope of the option archive all etc and the name of the source file You can test the validity of patterns you wish to use in your include exclude list before you actually insert them in your options file See the test pattern explanation below Syntax gt gt Query INCLexcl test rema Parameters test pattern Use for testing the validity of patterns you wish to use in your include exclude list When you use a test pattern with this command the following occurs e The internal include exclude list is not displayed e The pattern is processed as if it had come from an include exclude statement including all the usual error checking e The pattern is displayed as it would appear in the include exclude list If the test pattern has no errors the compiled pattern result is the same as the test pattern Examples Task Display a list of include exclude statements C
250. oring Data from a Backup Set Restoring an Entire or Partial Backup Set Restoring Files Additional Topics Authorizing Another Client Node to Restore or Retrieve Your Files Node Restoring or Retrieving Your Files to Another Client Node Restoring a Disk In Cae of Disk Lees Deleting File Spaces 24 24 as 20 25 20 25 27 27 27 28 28 29 lt 29 lt a 31 mei 32 35 2 BO 35 37 38 39 40 40 40 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 44 45 46 46 46 f 47 Restoring or Retrieving Files F m An th t Client 47 47 48 48 iii Chapter 6 Archiving and Retrieving Files 49 Understanding How et Aes ree Miriga 49 Performing Command Line Backups 49 Using the V2 Archive Option 50 Using the Web Client to Archive Data 50 Considerations bs a Dil Archiving Files Advanced Considerations oa 2 aD Deleting Archived Files D51 Requesting Archive Services for Remote Servers 51 Performing Command Line Retrieves 51 Using the Web Client to Retrieve Data 52 Chapter 7 Automating Tasks 53 Specifying Scheduling Options 53 Return Codes from the Command Line Interface 53 Managing the Client Scheduler Using the Client Acceptor Daemon Recommended Method 55 Configuring the CAD to Manage the Scheduler 55 Starting the Client Scheduler a
251. ork that the schedule has completed e Modify scheduling options in the client options file Notes 1 The schedule start time is based on the server s local time not the workstation s 2 Install the command line client and ensure the communication software is running before you start the client scheduler Specifying Scheduling Options You can modify scheduling options in the client options file dsm opt or in the graphical user interface However if your administrator specifies a value for these options that value overrides the value in your client For more information about scheduling options changing the scheduling mode specifying the TCP IP Addresa or port number or running commands before or after a schedule see Return Codes from the Command Line Interface Earlier versions of the backup archive client did not exit with consistent documented return codes This made automation with scripts batch files or other scheduling facilities difficult since there was no easy means of accurately determining the success or failure of the client operation The backup archive command line interface now exits with a return code that accurately reflects the success or failure of the client operation Users who already have scripts batch files or other scheduling or automation facilities that interpret the return code from the command line interface may need to make changes in order to accommodate these new return codes In
252. ormat To back up the NDS the target service agent TSANDS NLM must be loaded on one of the NetWare servers in the network Typically TSANDS NLM is loaded on the same server on which DSMC NLM is loaded but these modules can be loaded on separate servers See 8 for more discussion The target service agent for NetWare 5 1 servers is TSA500 NLM Use for TSA600 NLM for NetWare 6 1 servers Storage Management Data Requester SMDR SMDR is the communication agent between the backup application and the target service agent You must load the SMDR NLM module to perform a backup or restore of the NDS Tivoli Storage Manager automatically loads the SMDR NLM module SMS Currency It is important to use the most current SMS modules available from Novell to avoid problems such as memory leaks or server crashes The Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare client does not include these SMS modules You can obtain current copies of the TSA500 NLM or TSA600 NLM TSANDS NLM and SMDR NLM modules through Novell For current information about Novell NLM OS currency and SMS code levels visit http www novell com Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 227 For current information about Tivoli Storage Manager client currency visit http www tivoli com on the Web or our FTP server at ftp software ibm com Tivoli Storage Manager and NDS This section describes the nuances used in the Tivoli Storage Manager client when dealing with NDS trees Naming
253. ot encrypt files unless you include them for encryption processing Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 27 option see exclude encrypt option see To encrypt file data you must select an encryption key password which Tivoli Storage Manager uses to generate the encryption key for encrypting and decrypting the file data You can save the encryption key password in the TSM PWD file using the encryptkey option While restoring the encrypted file the client prompts you for the key password to decrypt the file in the following cases e If you set the encryptkey option to Prompt e If the encryption key password you supply at the prompt does not match e If you set the encryptkey option to Save and the local key available does not match For more information about this option see Do You Want to Back Up or Archive Files When the backup archive client backs up or archives a file it sends a copy of the file and its associated attributes to the server however backups and archives have different goals Backups protect against file damage The server maintains a sequence of backup versions for each file that you back up and older versions are deleted as newer versions are made The number of backup versions the server maintains is set by your administrator Note If you need to frequently create archives for the same data consider using instant archives backup sets instead Frequent archive operations can create a large amo
254. ou can back up specific volumes For example to back up only the data and sys volumes enter the following command load dsmc incremental data sys Performing an Incremental by Date Backup Use the incrbydate option with the incremental command to back up new and changed files with a modification date later than the last incremental backup stored at the server For example to perform an incremental by date back up of your default client domain enter the following command load dsmc incremental incrbydate 44 for more information about the incrbydate option Performing a Selective Backup You can use the selective command to back up specific files a group of files with similar names entire directories the NDS or the NDS This is called a selective backup You can use more than one file specification on the selective command For example to back up the sys proj test doc and the NDS files use load dsmc selective sys proj test doc nds For more information see Selective on page 221 Backing Up Directories If you back up a directory you can use the subdir yes option to include all the subdirectories under that directory in the backup For example to back up the sys proj directory and its subdirectories use load dsmc selective sys proj subdir yes Displaying Backup Processing Status During a backup by default Tivoli Storage Manager displays the status of each file it attempts to back up Tivoli Storage Manager
255. ou can compress files before sending them to the server e Whether you can delete backup and archive data from server storage Using Open Registration With open registration you can register your NetWare server as a client node with the server The first time you start a session Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for information necessary to register your NetWare server with the server identified in your client options file You need to supply your node name a password and contact information To register your NetWare server with additional servers edit the dsm opt file and change the communication options Then when you start a session your NetWare server is registered When you use open registration e Your client node is assigned to a policy domain named standard e You can define whether or not to compress files before sending them to the server See for more information about the compression option e You can delete archived copies of files from server storage but not backup versions of files If necessary your administrator can change these defaults later Chapter 2 Configuring IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 7 Creating an Include Exclude List Optional This is an optional task but an important one If you do not create an include exclude list Tivoli Storage Manager considers all files for backup services and uses the default management class for backup and archive services You can create an include exclude li
256. our client options file or scheduled work will not process If you specify the prompted mode you must supply values for the tcpclientaddress and tcpclientport options on the schedule command You can then be contacted at an address or port other than the one that made first contact with the server Notes 1 Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outside a firewall 2 The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax POLling gt gt SCHEDMODe gt lt PRompted Parameters POlling The client scheduler queries the server for scheduled work at prescribed time intervals This is the default You can set the time intervals using the queryschedperiod option PRompted The client scheduler waits for the server to contact your client node when scheduled work needs to be done Examples Options file schedmode prompted Command line schedmod po 130 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 131 Scrolllines The scrolllines option specifies the number of lines of information that display on your screen at one time Use this option when you set the scrollprompt option to Yes and you use commands Use the scrollprompt opti
257. ourceutilization is set to 3 then 3 sessions will be used for the restore If you increase the resourceutilization setting to 5 then 5 sessions will be used for the restore There is a 1 to 1 relationship to the number of restore sessions allowed and the resourceutilization setting Multiple restore sessions are only allowed for no query restore operations Considerations The following factors can affect the throughput of multiple sessions e The server s ability to handle multiple client sessions Is there sufficient memory multiple storage volumes and CPU cycles to increase backup throughput e The client s ability to drive multiple sessions sufficient CPU memory etc e The configuration of the client storage subsystem File systems that are striped across multiple disks using either software striping or RAID 5 can better handle an increase in random read requests than a single drive file system Additionally Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 123 a single drive file system may not see performance improvement if it attempts to handle many random concurrent read requests e Sufficient bandwidth in the network to support the increased traffic Potentially undesirable aspects of running multiple sessions include The client could produce multiple accounting records e The server may not start enough concurrent sessions To avoid this the server maxsessions parameter must be reviewed and possibly changed e A query nod
258. out storage management polices Chapter 4 Backing Up Your Data 29 30 To perform a full incremental backup see for more information During an incremental backup the client queries the server to determine the exact state of your files since last incremental backup The client uses this information to e Rename files if the information about the NetWare volume name has changed e Back up new files e Back up files whose contents changed since the last backup Changes include any of the following File size Date or time of last modification File attributes except for the A attribute the archive attribute The client ignores the archive attribute because other programs change the attribute during file copying even if the file does not change When you restore a file Tivoli Storage Manager restores the attributes to what they were when you backed up the file Trustee rights e Back up files whose directory attributes have changed e Expire backup versions of files on the server that do not have corresponding files on the workstation The result is that files which no longer exist on your NetWare server will not have active backup versions on the server e Rebind backup versions to management classes if you change management class assignments even if you do not back up the file Attention If a file s modification timestamp changes it will be backed up during the next full incremental backup The directori
259. plica root For example if the replica root was OU Islands 0 Greece you must issue the command load dsmc restore nds o greece ou islands o greece replace yes Since this is a partial restore you may decide to restore the entire NDS by entering the following command at the NetWare console load dsmc restore nds replace yes This eliminates the need for the next step while ensuring a consistent restore of the NDS tree See Obje j for more details about partial restore limitations Replace the objects which contained references to the failed Server and Volume objects You can do this by restoring the entire NDS using the following command at the NetWare console load dsmc restore nds replace yes The replace yes option ensures that place holders created by the restore process are properly replaced by real NDS objects If you are not comfortable with replacing the entire NDS you can selectively restore each object or manually recreate the objects with NWADMIN or NETADMIN Restore the volume s using Tivoli Storage Manager Use the following NetWare console command for each volume you want to restore load dsmc restore sys subdir yes replace all volinfo Where SYS is the name of the failed volume Verify restoration of the NDS file data and trustee data Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare Backup and Recovery Guide 239 Example 3 Loss of an Entire NDS Tree In a situation in which all network servers are destroye
260. port this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt TCPCLIENTPort client_port_address gt lt Parameters client_port_address Specifies the TCP IP port address you want the server to use to contact your client node The range of values is 1000 through 32767 the default is 1501 Examples Options file tcpclientp 1502 Command line tcpclientport 1492 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 139 Tcpport The tcpport option specifies a TCP IP port address for a server You can obtain this address from your administrator Tivoli Storage Manager Firewall Support To enable the backup archive client Command Line Admin client and the Scheduler running in polling mode to run outside a firewall the port specified by the option tcpport default 1500 must be opened in the firewall Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outside a firewall The webports option enables the use of the Web client outside a firewall by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon and the Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI The ports specified with the webports option and the client_option httpport must bera die fewalll Gee a for more information for further conside
261. program cannot back it up Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax Parameters gt gt CHAngingretries numberretries gt lt numberretries Specifies the number of times a backup or archive operation is attempted if the file is in use The range of values is zero through 4 the default is 4 Examples Options file changingretries 3 Command line cha 0 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Commmethod The commmethod option specifies the communication method you use to provide connectivity for client server communication Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt COMMMethod TCPip gt lt Parameters TCPip The Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP communication method Examples Options file commm tcp Command line commmethod tcp This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 79 Commrestartduration The commrestartduration option specifies the maximum number of minutes you want the client to attempt to reconnect with a server after a communication error occurs Note A scheduled event will continue if the client reconnects with
262. ps 1 Execute the PCONSOLE EXE utility 2 Select Print Queues from the Available Options menu Note Repeat this step for each print queue 3 Select the individual print queue from the Print Queues menu This creates the SRV and SYS files in the print queue directory After this step the print queue is fully functional This procedure has been verified in a JetDirect environment to correctly create the files necessary to make the print queues functional after a restore 242 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Notices References in this publication to Tivoli Systems or IBM products programs or services do not imply that they will be available in all countries in which Tivoli Systems or IBM operates Any reference to these products programs or services is not intended to imply that only Tivoli Systems or IBM products programs or services can be used Subject to valid intellectual property or other legally protectable right of Tivoli Systems or IBM any functionally equivalent product program or service can be used instead of the referenced product program or service The ev
263. pter 11 Using Commands 199 Query Access The query access command displays a list of nodes to whom you have given access to backup versions or archive copies of specific files Tivoli Storage Manager displays a list of authorization rules that you defined with the set access command The information includes e Authority you gave a node to restore backup versions or retrieve archive copies e The user s to whom you gave authorization e The files to which the node has access Syntax gt gt Query ACcess gt lt aiias Parameters options You can use the following common options with the query access command scrolllines scrollprompt For more information about common options you can use with this command see Cha Examples Task Display a list of nodes who have access to your files Command dsmc query access 200 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Query Archive The query archive command displays a list of your archived files the file size archive date file specification expiration date and file description Syntax kd Query ARchive filespec 7 gt lt ations DIRectory or NDS Parameters options You can use these command line options with the query archive command description dirsonly filelist filesonly fromdate fromnode fromtime todate scrolllines scrollprompt subdir See K
264. ptions File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No gt gt NWIGNORECOMpressbit gt lt LYes Parameters No Specifies that the NetWare client should interrogate the compressed file attribute during selection processing for incremental backups This is the default Yes Specifies that the NetWare client should ignore the setting of the compressed file attribute during selection processing for incremental backups If nwignorecompressbit is set to yes and the only change to the file is compression by the NetWare 4 operating system the file is not backed up incrementally Examples Options file nwignorecompressbit yes Command line Does not apply 108 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Nwpwfile The nwpwfile option encrypts the user ID and password for a local or remote NetWare server The client saves the encrypted user ID and password in the TSM PWD file Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax Yes gt gt NWPWFile gt lt LNo Parameters Yes Encrypts the user ID and password the first time a command is sent for a local or remote NetWare server The encrypted information is stored in the TSM PWD file When you enter subsequent commands for that server the password information is obtained from this file instead of sending a prompt This is the default No Does
265. quires registration at their web sites so the Tivoli Storage Manager Web client cannot automate the JRE installation on these platforms Instead the Web client displays a message containing a link to the appropriate URL from which you can manually install the JRE You can download and install the JRE 1 3 1 unless otherwise noted plug in manually from the appropriate URL e For Windows Solaris Linux http java sun com j2se 1 3 jre AIX 20 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide http www 106 ibm com developerworks java jdk aix index html Version 1 3 0 e HP UX http www hp com products1 unix java java2 sdkrtel_3 downloads index html e SGI IRIX http www sgi com developers devtools languages javaplugin131 html Note Note for proxy server users The JRE 1 3 1 may return a security exception if the Tivoli Storage Manager Web Client attempts to open a TCP IP socket to a socks server to communicate with the Tivoli Storage Manager Remote Client Agent To avoid this you can use one of the following methods to bypass a proxy server allowing the Web client to establish a direct connection to the Agent machine e Change your Java plug in settings For Windows 1 Open the Windows Start menu and select Settings gt Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click Java Plugin 3 In the Java Plug In Control Panel select the Proxies tab and uncheck the Use browser setti
266. r processing The Exclude dir statements override all include statements that match the pattern Table 4 Option for Excluding Directories Option Description Page exclude dir Excludes a directory its files and all its subdirectories and ba their files from backup processing For example exclude dir nw6 sys test dan datal excludes nw6 sys test dan datal its files and all its subdirectories and their files However you can still back up nw6 sys test dan datal its files and all its subdirectories and their files using a selective backup as follows dsmc sel subdir yes nw6 sys test dan datal However the next time you perform an incremental backup these backup versions are expired If you exclude a directory that was previously included Tivoli Storage Manager marks existing backup versions of the files and directories beneath it inactive during the next incremental backup Use this option to exclude a portion of your data in which no underlying files need to be backed up The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Controlling Backup and Archive Processing After Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates all exclude dir statements the following options are evaluated against the remaining list of objects available for processing If you exclude an object that was previously included Tivoli Storage Manager marks existing backup versions inactive during the next incremental backup Table 5 Options for Control
267. r restores all files in the source directories to the single target directory Examples Command line For the examples below assume the server file space contains the following backup copies sys hl ml file a sys hl ml file b sys hl m1 11 file x sys h1 ml 11 file y This command dsmc res sys hl ml sys ann preser complete Restores these directories and files 174 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide sys ann h1 ml file a sys ann h1 ml file b This command dsmc res sys hl ml sys ann preser nobase Restores these directories and files sys ann file a sys ann file b This command dsmc res backupset sys hl ml sys ann su yes preser nobase loc file Restores these directories and files sys ann file a sys ann file b sys ann file x sys ann file y This command dsmc res sys hl ml sys ann preser subtree Restores these directories and files sys ann ml file a sys ann ml file b This command dsmc res sys hl ml sys ann preser none Restores these directories and files sys ann file a sys ann file b This command dsmc res sys hl ml sys ann su yes preser complete Restores these directories and files sys ann hl ml file a sys ann hl ml1 file b sys ann h1 m1 11 file x sys ann hl ml1 11 file y This command dsmc res sys hl ml sys ann su yes preser nobase Restores these directories and files sys ann file a
268. r under the following conditions e The user id you specify has a login restriction based on time of day e The user id you specify has a login restriction based on number of concurrent connections e NetWare is not allowing logins DISABLE LOGIN was issued at the console e The password is incorrect or has expired Schema Backup or Restore The client will backup or archive the NDS Schema including the extended schema during an incremental backup of the NDS or explicitly with the volinformation option For example you can use the following commands to backup or archive of the Schema load dsmc incremental nds load dsmc selective nds subdir no volinfo explicit load dsmc archive nds subdir no volinfo explicit You can restore or retrieve the Schema information when performing a full or explicit NDS restore The Schema object will always be the first object restored or retrieved The volinformation option is not necessary for restore or retrieve load dsmc restore nds subdir yes replace al1 load dsmc retrieve nds subdir yes replace al You can explicitely restore or retrieve the NDS Root Schema and top level Organization as follows note that there is no file specification 230 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide load dsmc restore nds subdir no Server Specific Information When a server is lost due to a hard disk failure or disaster the server object
269. rations regarding Tivoli ETA Manager firewall support Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt TCPPort port_address 2 gt lt Parameters port_address Specifies the TCP IP port address that is used to communicate with a server The range of values is 1000 through 32767 the default is 1500 Examples Options file tcpp 1501 Command line tcpport 1501 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 140 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Tcpserveraddress The tcpserveraddress option specifies the TCP IP address for a server You can obtain this server address from your administrator Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt TCPServeraddress server_address gt lt Parameters server_address Specifies a 1 to 64 character TCP IP address for a server Specify only a dot address Examples Options file tcps dsmchost endicott ibm com Command line tcpserveraddress 129 33 24 99 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 141 Tcpwindowsize The tcpwindowsize option specifies the amount of data in kilobytes that is buffered when receiving data on a TCP IP connection To improve backup or archive performance increa
270. rchives include encrypt Includes specified files for encryption processing memoryefficientbackup Specifies a memory saving backup algorithm for fos incremental backups when used with the incremental command nwignorecompressbit Specifies whether you want to ignore the setting iog of the compressed file Co attribute during selection processing for incremental backups subdir Specifies whether to include subdirectories of a f34 named directory tapeprompt Specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to wait for a tape required for a backup or archive to be mounted or whether to prompt you for your choice Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 71 Restore and Retrieve Processing Options The following options relate to restore and retrieve processing Table 18 Restore and Retrieve Processing Options Option Description Page replace subdir Specifies whether to overwrite an existing file or to prompt you for your selection when you restore or retrieve files Specifies whether you want to include subdirectories of a named directory tapeprompt Specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to wait for a tape required for a restore or retrieve to be mounted or to prompt you for your choice Scheduling Options You can use the following options to regulate central scheduling Tivoli Storage Manager uses scheduling options only when the Scheduler is running Table 19
271. re an encrypted password file The default directory location depends upon how the client was installed Options File Place this option in the client options dsm opt file Syntax gt gt PASSWORDDIR directoryname gt lt Parameters directoryname Specifies the path in which to store the encrypted password file The name of the password file is TSM PWD If any part of the specified path does not exist Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to create it Examples Options file passworddir dmmock sys security tsm Command line Does not apply Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Postschedulecmd The postschedulecmd option specifies a command that the client program processes after it runs a schedule The client program waits for the command to complete before it continues with other processing Notes 1 If the postschedulecmd command does not complete with return code 0 the client will report that the scheduled event completed with return code 8 unless the scheduled operation encounters a more severe error yielding a higher return code If you do not want the postschedulecmd command to be governed by this rule you can create a script or batch file that invokes the command and exits with return code 0 Then configure postschedulecmd to invoke the script or batch file The return code for the postschedulecmd command is not tracked and does not influence the re
272. re no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc restore inactive sys u id projecta Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 165 Incrbydate Note If you have limited time during the week to perform backups but extra time on weekends you can maintain current server storage of your NetWare server files by performing an incremental backup with the incrbydate option on weekdays and a full incremental backup on weekends Use the incrbydate option with the incremental command to back up new and changed files with a modification date later than the last incremental backup stored at the server unless the file is excluded from backup Files added at the client after the last incremental backup but with a modification date earlier than the last incremental are not backed up An incremental by date updates the date and time of the last incremental at the server If an incremental by date is performed on only part of a file system the date of the last full incremental is not updated and the next incremental by date will back up these files again Both full incrementals and incrementals by date back up new and changed files An incremental by date takes less time to process than a full incremental and requires less memory However unlike a full incremental an incremental by date does not maintain current server storage of all your NetWare server files because e It does not expire backup versions of files that are delete
273. remental 31 10 12 255 Index incremental by date continued description 31 of directories restrictions 31 when to use 31 installation requirements NetWare client 2 installing Tivoli Storage Manager overview 3 interactive mode 183 interactive session ending 198 starting 19 198 using 198 L language option 100 largecommbuffers option 101 latest option 167 local backup set enabling GUI for local restore 46 location option 168 log pruning error 92 long names affecting include exclude statements 34 backing up files with 28 converted to Macintosh name space 34 migration to 32 problems converting from short names 34 restoring to volume without long name space 34 running backup before converting 34 support for 32 with embedded blanks 34 loop command 198 Macintosh name space non support 32 macro command 199 managedservices option 102 management classes assigning to directories assigning to files 64 backup 40 binding to files 66 default 59 displaying 60 displaying information about 206 overriding during archive processing 65 overriding the default 64 processing 64 questions to consider 63 selecting for files 63 selecting for NDS and bindery 65 specifying with include option 64 using management class example 64 maxcmdretries option 104 65 86 memory required for client processing UNIX restrictions 31 memory requirements NetWare client 2 memoryefficientbackup option 105 messages displayin
274. rganization archive nds volinfo subdir no Note The following commands are not case sensitive and will produce the same results query backup nds 0 TSM query backup nds o Tsm Include Exclude Processing You can use include and exclude statements to control which sections of the NDS tree are eligible for backup processing You can use include exclude processing to help distribute the NDS backup over multiple servers The following are examples of excluding NDS objects e To exclude all objects under organization O TSM inclusive exclude dir nds o tsm e To exclude all common leaf objects under organizational unit O TSM All containers i e organizations under O TSM will be processed exclude nds o tsm e To exclude all objects under organizational unit O TSM San Jose inclusive If the organizational unit name contains spaces enclose the target in quotes exclude dir nds o tsm ou San Jose e To exclude all leaf objects named RAMKE exclude nds cn ramke Note Include exclude processing does not affect processing of container entries As with directories all containers will be backed up regardless of the include exclude statements you use Tivoli Storage Manager client Versions 4 and above accept the exclude dir option which also exclude directory entries Note You cannot use the include and exclude dir options together The following example will not produce desired results exclude dir nds 0 TS
275. ring the first attempt Tivoli Storage Manager will not back up or archive the file See serialization Contrast with dynamic shared dynamic and shared static storage pool A named set of storage volumes used as the destination of backup archive or migrated copies system drive or partition On Windows NT the drive or partition on which Windows NT is installed Glossary 251 T TCA Trusted Communications Agent TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol timeout A time event involving e An event that happens at the end of a predetermined period of time that began at the happening of another specified event e A time interval allotted for certain operations to happen For example response to polling or addressing before system operation is interrupted and must be restarted e A terminal feature that logs off a user if an entry is not made within a specified period of time Tivoli Storage Manager A client server licensed program product that provides storage management and data access services to customers in a multivendor computer environment Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP A standard set of communication protocols that supports peer to peer connectivity of functions for both local and wide area networks Trusted Communications Agent TCA UNIX A program that can handle the sign on password protocol when password access is generated The main process for example dsm dsmc makes a run
276. rocessed This option differs from the filesonly option in that the filesonly option archives the directories that exist in the path of the source file specification This option is not persistent and must be explicitly specified in each archive command Note The v2archive option should not be used when archiving the NDS For more information see If Tivoli Storage Manager does not archive the file check to see if it is marked for execute only or if it is opened and locked by another user Your administrator might have set_up schedules to automatically archive certain files on your NetWare server See Cha information on checking and running the schedules availble you See for more information Using the Web Client to Archive Data You can use Tivoli Storage Manager to archive specific files a group of files with similar names or entire directories You can also assign a unique description for each group of files you archive archive package If you have the Web client started on your workstation you can archive your data using the Web client backup archive GUI See Sta information on starting the Web cieni To archive your files using the Web client backup archive GUI 1 Click the Archive button from the main window The Archive window appears 50 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide 2 Expand the directory tree by clicking on the sign Click the selection
277. roj planning you would enter dsmc restore nwl sys project budget nw2 sys newproj planning Enter parameters in the order indicated in the command syntax diagram File Specification Syntax Use the following syntax rules when entering file specification parameters such as filespec sourcefilespec and destinationfilespec e The only command that accepts a simple file space name is the incremental command The following example is valid dsmc i sys The following example is not valid dsmc sel sys e When entering the sourcefilespec if the directory name ends with then is implied When entering a destinationfilespec if the name ends with then it is considered a directory otherwise it is considered a file The following example illustrates these two rules Even though mydir and yourdir are directories the command will fail because is implied after mydir and yourdir is considered a file restore sys mydir sys away yourdir The following example illustrates the second rule Even though mydir and yourdir are directories the command will fail because mydir and yourdir are considered files restore sys mydir sys away yourdir e Do not use wildcards as part of the file space name or anywhere in the destinationfilespec The one exception to this rule is the set access command where wildcards are permitted in the two lowest levels of the file spec For example use the following command to grant access to all files in and
278. rsion 1 0 0 SMDR Version 1 0 0 Chapter 11 Using Commands 211 User Password Location goethe sys tsm 040199 5e82fd66 pwd User Password Valid Yes tsm gt Example 3 A sample output for query tsa non NetWare platforms follows Tivoli Storage Manager Command Line Backup Client Interface Version 3 Release 7 C Copyright IBM Corporation 1990 1999 All Rights Reserved Node Name spikes Session established with server spikes Windows NT Server Version 3 Release 1 Level 0 1 Server date time 06 04 1999 16 09 52 Last access 06 04 1999 16 08 39 Selected function is not supported for this client platform tsm gt 212 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Restart Restore The restart restore command displays a list of your restartable restore sessions in the server database You can select zero or more restartable restore sessions that you want to restart The restarted restore uses the same options you used in the failed restore The restarted restore continues from the point at which the restore previously failed To cancel restartable restore sessions use the cancel restore command Use the restart restore command when e Restartable restore sessions lock the file space at the server so that files cannot be moved off the server s sequential volumes e You cannot back up files affected by the restartable restore Options from the failed se
279. s e A description of the command e A syntax diagram of the command The command name is shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase characters The uppercase characters indicate the minimum abbreviation you can use for the command name See for an explanation of these diagrams e Detailed descriptions of the command parameters If the parameter is a constant a value that does not change the minimum abbreviation is shown in uppercase letters e Examples of using the command 186 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Archive The archive command archives a single file selected files or all files in a directory and its subdirectories on a server Archive files that you want to preserve in their current condition To release storage space on your workstation delete files as you archive them using the deletefiles option Retrieve the archived files to your workstation whenever you need them again Syntax gt gt ARchive x E L E Caines cary or NDS Parameters options You can use these command line options with the archive command archmc deletefiles description dirsonly filelist and volinformation For more information about command line options see ICh You can use the changingretries and subdir common options with the archive command See Cha g information about these common options filespec Specifies path and name of the file you want to arch
280. s or both Tivoli is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States or other countries or both Other company product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 ix X Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide About This Book IBM Tivoli Storage Manager is a client server licensed product that provides storage management services in a multi platform computer environment The backup archive client program permits users to back up and archive files from their workstations or file servers to storage and restore and retrieve backup versions and archived copies of files to their local file systems In addition to the backup archive client Tivoli Storage Manager includes the following components available on a variety of platforms e A server program that permits systems to perform as a backup and archive server for distributed workstations and file servers e An administrative client program that you can access from a Web browser or the command line The program permits an administrator to control and monitor server activities define storage management policies for backup archive and space management services and set up schedules to perform those services at regular intervals e An application program interface API that permits you to enhance an existing application with storage management ser
281. s 173 Preservepath The preservepath option specifies how much of the source path to reproduce as part of the target directory path when you restore or retrieve files to a new location Use the subdir yes option to include the entire subtree of the source directory directories and files below the lowest level source directory as source to be restored If a required target directory does not exist it is created If a target file has the same name as a source file it is overwritten Use the replace prompt option to have Tivoli Storage Manager prompt you before files are overwritten Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax subtree gt gt PRESERvepath 4 eee L complete nobase none Parameters subtree Creates the lowest level source directory as a subdirectory of the target directory Files from the source directory are stored in the new subdirectory This is the default complete Restores the entire path starting from the root into the specified directory The entire path includes all the directories except the file space name nobase Restores the contents of the source directory without the lowest level or base directory into the specified destination directory none Restores all selected source files to the target directory No part of the source path at or above the source directory is reproduced at the target If you specify subdir yes Tivoli Storage Manage
282. s and archives include encrypt Includes the specified files for encryption processing By default Tivoli Storage Manager does not perform encryption processing Parameters pattern Specifies the objects to include for backup or archive processing or to assign a specific management class End the pattern with a file specification If the pattern begins with a single or double quote or contains any embedded blanks or equal signs you must surround the value in either single or double quotation marks The opening and closing quotation marks must be the same type of quotation marks mgmtclassname Specifies the name of the management class to assign to the objects If a management class is not specified the default management class is used Examples Options file include servera sys proj text devel include servera sys proj text textfiles include managal1 include archive servera sys proj text myarchiveclass include backup servera sys proj text mybackupclass include compression servera sys proj text devel include encrypt serverb sys proj gordon Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 99 Language The language option specifies the national language in which to present client messages You can use American English AMENG with all clients Currently the NetWare client only supports American English AMENG Note The language option does not affect the Web client The
283. s specified along with the virtualnodename option the password is not stored on the local machine If you specify the nodename option Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 17 the password is stored on the local machine See a for more information about the virtualnodename option Starting a Session During installation of the NetWare backup archive client you may have updated your autoexec ncf file to include the Tivoli Storage Manager directory in your path To start Tivoli Storage Manager from this directory begin a Tivoli Storage Manager command with dsmc If you did not update autoexec ncf or you want to start Tivoli Storage Manager from a different directory you must include the directory in the command line For example sys tivoli tsm client ba dsmc You can start a client command session from a NetWare server in either batch or interactive mode Using Batch Mode Use batch mode when you want to enter a single client command You must precede each command with dsmc If a Tivoli Storage Manager password is required at your NetWare server Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for your password each time you enter a command For example to issue the incremental command enter the following at the NetWare colon prompt dsmc incremental If your client node name is nwserver Tivoli Storage Manager responds Please enter password for node nwserver When you type in your password and press Enter the password does not displ
284. s to denote the destination for the restored filelist entries For example in the restore command dsmc restore filelist sys u projecta files voll u dirl record preservepath complete the file specification voll u dirl record represents the restore destination for all entries in the filelist However in the selective command dsmc selective filelist sys u projecta files voll u dirl record the file specification voll u dirl record is ignored If you specify a directory in a filelist for the delete archive command the directory is not deleted Filelists that you use with the delete archive command should not include directories The entries in the list will be processed in the order they appear in the filelist For optimal processing performance pre sort the filelist by file space name and path Note Tivoli Storage Manager may back up a directory twice if the following conditions exist e The filelist contains an entry for the directory e The filelist contains one or more entries for files within that directory 158 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide e No backup of the directory exists For example your filelist includes the entries sys proj myfile and sys proj If the proj directory does not exist on the server the sys proj directory is sent to the server a second time Syntax gt gt FILEList filelistspec gt lt Parameters filelistspec Specifies the l
285. se the tcpwindowsize on the server To improve restore or retrieve performance increase the tcpwindowsize on the client Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt TCPWindowsize window_size gt lt Parameters window_size Specifies the size in kilobytes to use for your client node TCP IP sliding window The range of values is 1 through 64 the default is 32 Note Depending on the operating system communication settings your system might not accept all values in the range of values Examples Options file tcpwindowsize 1 Command line tcpw 24 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 142 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Timeformat The timeformat option specifies the format in which you want to display system time Use this option if you want to change the default time format for the language of the message repository you are using Note This timeformat option does not affect the Web client The Web client uses the time format for the locale that the browser is running in If the browser is not running in a locale that Tivoli Storage Manager supports the Web client uses the time format for American English Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt TIMEformat format_number gt lt Parameters
286. sing incremental backups This is the default Yes Your client node uses the method that requires less memory when processing incremental backups Examples Options file memoryefficientbackup yes Command line memoryef no Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 105 Nodename Use the nodename option in your client options file dsm opt to identify your workstation to the server You can use different node names to identify multiple operating systems on your workstation When you use the nodename option Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for the password assigned to the node you specify if a password is required a different workstation use the virtualnodename option See for more information If you are working from a different workstation you can use the nodename option even if the passwordaccess option is set to generate however the password will be stored in the registry To prevent this use the virtualnodename option instead of nodename Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt NODename nodename gt lt Parameters nodename Specifies a 1 to 64 character node name for which you want to request Tivoli Storage Manager services The default is the name of the workstation Permit the node name to default to the workstation name Examples Options file nodename cougar Command line nod banshee This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not
287. sion processing e Tivoli Storage Manager processes exclude dir and other include exclude statements first Tivoli Storage Manager then considers any exclude compression statements For example consider the following include exclude list exclude servera sys proj exclude compression servera sys proj file txt include servera sys proj file txt Tivoli Storage Manager examines the statements reading from bottom to top and determines that servera sys proj file txt is a candidate for back up Tivoli Storage Manager then examines the exclude compression servera sys proj file txt statement and determines that it is not a candidate for compression processing Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 93 e Include exclude compression processing is valid for backup and archive processing only Options File Place these options in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt options pattern gt lt exclude exclude backup exclude file exclude file backup These options are equivalent Use these options to exclude a file or group of files from backup services exclude archive Excludes a file or a group of files that match the pattern from archive services only exclude compression Excludes files from compression processing if the compression option is set to yes This option applies to backups and archives exclude dir Excludes a directory its files and all its subdirectories and their files from backup processing For
288. sions on the server for files or directories that are deleted from the workstation e Rebind backup versions to management classes if the management class assignments change Incremental by Date An incremental by date backup backs up new and changed files with a modification date later than the date of the last incremental backup stored at the server unless the files are excluded from backup by an exclude statement If an incremental by date is performed on only part of a file system the date of the last full incremental is not updated and the next incremental by date will back up these files again Use the query filespace command to determine the date and time of the last incremental backup of the entire file system To perform an incremental by date backup use the incrbydate option with the incremental command Unlike a full incremental an incremental by date does not maintain current server storage of all your NetWare server files because e It does not expire backup versions of files that are deleted from the NetWare server e It does not rebind backup versions to a new management class if the management class has changed e It does not back up files with attributes that have changed unless the modification dates and times have also changed e It ignores the copy group frequency attribute of management classes e It does not handle name space changes on the volume For these reasons if you have limited time during the week
289. space the attempt will fail because the original restore was not completed You can restart the restore at the point of interruption by entering the restart restore command or you can delete Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 41 the restartable restore using the cancel restore command If you restart the interrupted restore it will restart with the first transaction which may consist of one or more files not completely restored when the interruption occurred Because of this you may receive some replace prompts for files from the interrupted transaction which were already restored The differences between the standard restore process and the no query restore process are outlined below Standard Restore Process 1 The client queries the server for a list of files backed up for the client file space being restored 2 The server sends a list of backed up files that match the restore criteria If both active and inactive files are to be restored information about all backed up files is sent to the client 3 The list of files returned from the server is sorted in client memory to determine the file restore order and to minimize tape mounts required to perform the restore 4 The client tells the server to restore file data and directory objects 5 The directories and files to be restored are sent from the server to the client No Query Restore Process 1 The client tells the server that a no query restore is going to be performed a
290. specified on the changingretries option in your client options file If the object is changed during every backup or archive attempt it is not backed up or archived e Dynamic A file or directory is backed up or archived on the first attempt regardless of whether it changes during a backup or archive However if the open file has the share flag set to Deny_Read the backup does not occur e Shared dynamic A file or directory is backed up or archived regardless of whether it changes during a backup or archive Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to perform a back up or archive as many as four additional times depending on the value specified on the changingretries option in your client options file without the file changing during the attempt The file is backed up or archived on the last try even if it has changed However if the open file has the share flag set to Deny_Read the backup does not occur 62 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Note Be careful when you select a management class containing a copy group that specifies shared dynamic or dynamic for serialization backup If you select a management class that permits a file to be backed up or archived while it is in use the backup version or archived copy stored on the server might be a fuzzy copy A fuzzy copy is a backup version or archived copy that does not accurately reflect what is currently in the file It might contain some b
291. splayed on your screen Output is also sent to the file you specify with this option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt SCHEDLOGName filespe c ___________________________ Parameters filespec Specifies the path and file name where you want to store schedule log information when processing scheduled work If you specify a file name only the file is stored in your current directory The default is the installation directory with a file name of dsmsched 1og Examples Options file schedlogname dmmock sys mydir schedlog jan Command line schedlogn dmmock sys mydir schedlog jan This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 128 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Schedlogretention The schedlogretention option specifies the number of days to keep entries in the schedule log and whether to save the pruned entries The schedule log is pruned after a scheduled event completes Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax N D gt gt SCHEDLOGRetention ra Ldays LS Parameters N or days Specifies how long to wait before pruning the schedule log N Do not prune the log This permits the log to grow indefinitely This is th
292. ssigned to each server You can back up server centric ids on a NetWare operating system as part of the server speci ic in ormation resource using the Tivoli Storage Manager client See i for more information about backup and restore processing for this resource If you do not have a backup of the server specific information or do not have the ability to backup this information please read the following information When servers are lost due to hard disk failures or disasters Server objects must be manually deleted because NetWare currently requires that new Server objects be created during the installation process see following recovery scenarios for examples When the old Server object is deleted any objects which have references to the Server object will lose their references Therefore objects that reference Server objects will have to be handled accordingly Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare Backup and Recovery Guide 233 Currently there are two object types in the base schema which have references to server objects e Directory Map Objects e Queue Objects If the Server object is lost you can perform either of the following steps to recover these object types e Delete the referencing object and then restore the object from Tivoli Storage Manager e Delete the referencing object and recreate the object manually using the NetWare utilities Because of the dependency on the server centric id you cannot restore these obj
293. ssion option to yes and Tivoli Storage Manager finds a file that the NetWare operating system already compresses the file is sent to the server without further compression as a NetWare compressed file e Tivoli Storage Manager processes exclude dir and other include exclude statements first Tivoli Storage Manager then considers any include compression statements For example consider the following include exclude list include compression servera sys proj file txt exclude servera sys proj file txt Tivoli Storage Manager examines the exclude servera sys proj file txt statement first and determines that servera sys proj file txt is excluded from processing and is not a candidate for compression processing e Include exclude compression processing is valid for backup and archive processing only See amp for more information Options File Place these options in the client options file dsm opt 98 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Syntax gt gt options pattern gt lt noneclassnome include include backup include file These options are equivalent Use these options to include files or assign management classes for backup processing include archive Includes files or assigns management classes for archive processing include compression Includes files for compression processing if you set the compression option to yes This option applies to backup
294. ssion supersede new or changed options for the restarted session Syntax gt gt RESTArt Restore aan Parameters options For information about common options you can use with the restart restore command see K Examples Task Restart a restore Command restart restore This command is only valid in interactive mode Chapter 11 Using Commands 213 Restore The restore command obtains copies of backup versions of your files from a server To restore files specify the directories or selected files or select the files from a list Restore files to the directory from which you backed them up or to a different directory Tivoli Storage Manager uses the preservepath option with the subtree value as the default for restoring files For more information see If you set the subdir option to yes when restoring a specific path and file Tivoli Storage Manager recursively restores all subdirectories under that path and any instances of the specified file that exist under any of those subdirectories System trustee rights are restored as part of the file restore process They cannot be restored alone You can use the restore command to restore a backup set See Restore Backupset for the syntax Syntax FILE Restore l H sourcesi lespec options DIRectory or NDS destinationfi respel Parameters file This parameter specifies that the source file specification is an explicit filename
295. ssor 2 Command line processorutilization 10 Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 119 Queryschedperiod The queryschedperiod option specifies the number of hours you want the client scheduler to wait between attempts to contact the server for scheduled work This option applies only when you set the schedmode option to polling This option is used only when the scheduler is running Your administrator can also set this option If your administrator specifies a value for this option that value overrides the value set in your client options file after your client node successfully contacts the server Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt QUERYSCHedperiod hours gt lt Parameters hours Specifies the number of hours the client scheduler waits between attempts to contact the server for scheduled work The range of values is 1 through 9999 the default is 12 Examples Options file querysch 6 Command line queryschedperiod 8 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 120 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Quiet The quiet option limits the number of messages that display on your screen during processing For example when you run th
296. st to exclude a specific file or groups of files from backup services and to assign specific management classes to files Tivoli Storage Manager backs up any file that is not explicitly excluded You should exclude Tivoli Storage Manager client directories from backup services You can use the query inclexcl command to generate a list of the files that are currently being excluded from backup Specify your include exclude list in your client options file dsm opt This list can also contain include exclude statements obtained from include exclude files which you specify with the inclexcl option When processing occurs the include exclude statements within the include exclude file are placed at the position occupied by the inclexcl option in dsm opt in the same order and processed accordingly See for detailed information about specifying an include exclude file using the inclexcl option You can also create an include exclude list by performing the following steps 1 Determine your include and exclude requirements 2 Locate the include exclude section in your client options file 3 Enter your include and exclude statements_using the appropriate include exclude options as described in Because Tivoli Storage Manager processes your include exclude list from the bottom of the list up it is important to enter all your include exclude statements in the proper order For example in the following include exclude list the includefile txt f
297. sword osecret nsecret Chapter 11 Using Commands 225 226 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare Backup and Recovery Guide This chapter discusses the basic structure of the NDS Novell Directory Services and provides recovery scenarios to protect NDS data against loss or corruption The NDS is an object oriented hierarchical database that manages resources such as servers users groups file systems and printers in a network The NDS is a global service that physically resides on multiple servers within a network Please refer to the publication Novell NetWare Introduction to Novell Directory Services for general information about the NDS This publication should be included in the NetWare installation package NDS Backup Considerations Storage Management Services Tivoli Storage Manager uses Novell s Storage Management Services SMS as the interface to the NetWare operating system This section discusses the pertinent components of the SMS architecture Note that any limitations existing in the SMS architecture imply a limitation of Tivoli Storage Manager Target Service Agent TSA A target in the context of SMS is an entity on the network that requires back up To Tivoli Storage Manager these targets are NetWare servers and NDS trees The TSA presents data in a system independent data format known as SIDF system independent data f
298. sys ann file b sys ann 11 file x sys ann 11 file y This command dsmc res sys hl ml sys ann su yes preser subtree Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 175 Restores these directories and files sys ann ml file a sys ann ml file b sys ann ml1 11 file x sys ann ml 11 file y This command dsmc res sys hl ml sys ann su yes preser none Restores these directories and files sys ann file a sys ann file b sys ann file x sys ann file y 176 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Todate Use the todate option with the totime option to specify an ending date and time For example you might request a list of files that were backed up before 11 59 PM on June 30 2002 Use the todate and totime options with the fromtime and fromdate options to request a list of backed up or archived files within a period of time For example you might request a list of files that were backed up between 6 00 AM on July 1 2002 and 11 59 PM on July 30 2002 Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt TODate date gt lt Parameters date Specifies an ending date Enter the date in the format you selected with the dateformat option When you include dateformat with a command it must precede the fromdate pitdate and todate options Examples Command line dsmc restore sys test todate 12 11 2002 Chapter
299. sys home NewRestoreLocation Chapter 11 Using Commands 215 Restore Backupset The restore backupset command restores a backup set from the server or from a local file If you are restoring a file space from a backup set to a system that did not perform the original backup you may need to e Specify a destination e Use the syntax below to specify the source file e Do both of the above If you are unable to restore a backup set from portable media check with your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator to ensure that the portable media was created on a device using a compatible format Note There is no support in the API for the backup set format Therefore backup set data that was backed up via the API cannot be restored or used NDS restores are not supported If Tivoli Storage Manager creates a backup set containing only the NDS and you attempt to restore it with the restore backupset command an error message appears If a backup set contains both a file specification and the NDS no error message is produced however only the file specification is restored To restore the NDS you must use the use the restore command from the command line The restore backupset command restores a backup set from the server or a local file only For example the following command restores a backup set from the server tsm gt res backupset bkset 101394 su y rep all and the following command restores the backup set from file on a local NetWar
300. t backed up C1 OO Ns Note include and exclude dir cannot be used together For example the following example is not valid exclude dir nds o adsm include nds o adsm ou tucson To achieve the desired results enter exclude nds o adsm include nds o adsm ou tucson Example 4 Backing up the NDS To back up objects in container ou islands o greece code the following statements in the dsm opt file exclude nds o greece include nds o greece ou Islands You must specify the syntax as it appears in the examples Notes 1 Include and exclude processing does not affect processing of container entries All containers are backed up 2 The NDS names that are stored by Tivoli Storage Manager are case sensitive file space qualifiers are not 14 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Accessing Remote NetWare Servers You can access other NetWare servers with Tivoli Storage Manager if you have one of the following e The NetWare administrator password e The supervisor password for each server e A user ID and password with administrator or supervisor equivalence To back up restore archive and retrieve files on remote NetWare 5 1 and NetWare 6 servers you must have e Version 5 1 NetWare server Run SMDR NLM on the local server and TSA500 NLM or TSANDS NLM and SMDR NLM on the remote server e Version 6 NetWare server Run SMDR NLM on the local server
301. t has been backed up or archived from a Tivoli Storage Manager V5 1 client to any Tivoli Storage Manager server cannot be restored or retrieved using a Tivoli Storage Manager V4 2 1 or lower level client Changes to Client Server Communications Tivoli Storage Manager NetWare client no longer supports the IPX SPX and SNA LU6 2 APPC communication methods Therefore the NetWare client no longer supports the following options e ipxbuffersize e ipxserveraddress e ipxsocket e cpipbuffersize e cpicmodename e partnerluname e symbolicdestination tpname TCP IP is the replacement communication method for former IPX SPX and SNA LU6 2 APPC users of the NetWare client For more information aroni the TCP IP communication method see a a g Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 1 Additional Migration Information When you install the Web client you must install the backup archive client for the language you want to use NetWare Client Environment This section contains client environment information IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client components and hardware and software requirements for the NetWare platform Attention For current information concerning the client environment prerequisites for all Tivoli Storage Manager supported client platforms refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media Client Components e Backup archive client command line e Tivoli Storage Manager API e
302. t kinds of data such as e System data that is critical for the business e Application data that changes frequently e Report data that Management reviews monthly Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 59 e Legal information that must be retained indefinitely requiring a large amount of disk space Most of the work you do with storage management policies is with management classes You must associate files directories and the NDS with appropriate management classes If you do not associate a file or the NDS with a management class Tivoli Storage Manager uses the default management class in the active policy set If you do not specify a management class for directories Tivoli Storage Manager uses the management class in the active policy set with the largest retain only setting You can use include statements in your include exclude list to associate files with management classes See a a more information In your client Spans file dsm opt ie you can_associate directories with a management class using the dirmc option See include exclude list See for more information Within a management class the specific backup and archive requirements are in copy groups Copy groups define the specific storage management attributes that describe how the server manages backed up or archived data Copy groups include both backup copy groups and archive copy groups A management class can have one backup copy group one archive copy group
303. t of the publications that are referred to in this manual Table 2 Tivoli Storage Manager Client Publications Publication Title Order Number Tivoli Storage Manager Messages GC32 0767 Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Backup Archive Clients GC32 0788 Installation and User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation GC32 0789 and User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager for Macintosh Backup Archive Client GC32 0787 Installation and User s Guide Tivoli Space Manager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage GC32 0794 Management Clients Tivoli Storage Manager Using the Application Programming Interface GC32 0793 Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Quick Start GC32 0770 Tivoli Storage Manager for HP UX Quick Start GC32 0774 Tivoli Storage Manager for OS 390 and z OS Quick Start GC32 0777 Tivoli Storage Manager for Sun Solaris Quick Start GC32 0780 Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Quick Start GC32 0784 The Tivoli Storage Manager publications are available on the following CD ROM Tivoli Storage Manager Publications Version 5 1 SK3T 8176 Tivoli Storage Manager publications are available in softcopy at the following Web page http www tivoli com support public Prodman public_manuals td TD_PROD_LIST html The IBM International Technical Support Center redbooks are available in softcopy on the IBM Redbooks Web site at the following Web page http www redbooks ibm com You can or
304. t the file space that you want to delete Your administrator must give you authority to delete a file space You need BACKDEL authority if the file space you want to delete contains backup versions or ARCHDEL authority if the file space contains archive copies If the file space contains both backup versions and archive copies you need both types of authority Attention When you delete a file space you delete all backup versions and archive copies within that file space When you delete a file space you cannot restore the files Verify that the files are obsolete before you delete them Syntax gt lt gt gt Delete Filespace ations Parameters options You can use these common options with the delete filespace command scrollprompt scrolllines nasnodename For more information see Examples Task Delete a file space Command dsmc delete filespace Chapter 11 Using Commands 191 Expire The expire command inactivates the backup objects you specify in the file specification or with the filelist option When working in interactive mode a prompt notifies you before files are expired The expire command does not remove workstation files If you expire a file or directory that still exists on your workstation the file or directory is backed up again during the next incremental backup unless the object is excluded by include exclude processing If you expire a directory that contains active files
305. t the portable media was created on a device using a format that is compatible with your device 2 There is no support in the Tivoli Storage Manager API for the backup set format Restoring an Entire or Partial Backup Set Tivoli Storage Manager considers a backup set as one object containing the whole file structure You can restore the entire backup set or just select portions The backup set media is self describing and contains all the information required to perform a successful restore The command line can be used to restore an entire backup set or individual files within a backup set See d for information on how to use the restore backupset commana Restoring Files Additional Topics This section discusses additional topics related to performing restores You do not need to understand this information in order to use Tivoli Storage Manager for basic tasks 46 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Authorizing Another Client Node to Restore or Retrieve Your Files You can authorize another client node to restore your backup versions or retrieve your archive copies To authorize another node to restore or retrieve your files use the set access command You can also use the query access command to see your current list and delete access to delete nodes from the list For more information on the commands see The Tivoli Storage Manager node you are authorizing m
306. t to generate and you specify the password option the password option is ignored Set the passwordaccess option to generate when using the Web client Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax prompt gt gt PASSWORDAccess gt lt generate Parameters prompt You are prompted for your workstation password each time a client connects to the server This is the default To keep your client node password secure enter commands without the password and wait for Tivoli Storage Manager to prompt you for the password API applications must supply the password when a session is initiated The application is responsible for obtaining the password generate Encrypts and stores your password locally and generates a new password when the old password expires An encrypted password is kept on your workstation when a session starts A password prompt displays when registering a workstation with a server using open registration or if your administrator changes your password manually 114 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file passwordaccess generate Command line passwordaccess generate This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 115 Passworddir 116 The passworddir option forces the directory location in which to sto
307. taddress Specifies the TCP IP address of your client node IRE Use this option only with the schedule command when you specify prompted as the schedule mode tcpclientport Specifies the TCP IP port number of your client Ld node Use this option only with the schedule command when you specify prompted as the schedule mode Format and Language Options You can use the following options to select different formats for date time numbers and for different languages if you have the appropriate client installed for that language Table 20 Format and Language Options Option Description Page dateformat Specifies the format for displaying dates ba language Specifies the language used for messages kod numberformat Specifies the format for displaying numbers kod timeformat Specifies the format for displaying time Ld Command Processing Options The following options apply when you use Tivoli Storage Manager commands Table 21 Command Processing Options Option Description Page editor Specifies if the command line interface editor and bdl command retrieve capability is turned on or off quiet Specifies that processing information does not display on your screen This option can be overidden by the server scrolllines Specifies the number of lines to display at one time when displaying a list of items Use this option only when scrollprompt is set to yes scrollprompt Specifies whether Tivoli Storag
308. tal command to back up only new and changed files If back up of a file fails determine if it is marked for execute only or if it is opened and locked by another user If you set the subdir option to yes when backing up a specific path and file Tivoli Storage Manager recursively backs up all subdirectories under that path and any instances of the specified file that exist under any of those subdirectories During a selective backup a directory path may be backed up even if the specific file that was targeted for backup is not found For example dsmc selective sys dirl dir2 bogus txt still backs up dirl and dir2 even if the file bogus txt does not exist If the selective command is retried because of a communication failure or session loss the transfer statistics will display the number of bytes Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to transfer during all command attempts Therefore the statistics for bytes transferred may not match the file statistics such as those for file size Syntax Y SELective filespec 7 gt lt aioa LDIRectory or NDS Parameters options You can use these command line options with the selective command dirsonly filesonly volinformation filelist For more information see Chapter 11 Using Commands 221 filespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to back up Use wildcard characters to select a group of files or all the files in a directory You can enter
309. ted 21 Setting User Privileges If you plan to use the Web client ensure that you were assigned an administrative user ID with system privilege policy privilege client access authority or client owner authority See a more information about these saenenaes Note Use the revokeremoteaccess option to restrict an administrator with client access privilege from accessing your workstation through the Web client Administrators with client owner privilege system privilege or policy privilege can access the Web client See k a information about the revokeremoteaccess option See Installing and Using the Web Client If you did not install the Web client during the installation process you can use the command line to install and configure it To install and configure the Web client from the command line perform the following steps 1 Ensure that you specify passwordaccess generate and nwpwfile yes in the client options file dsm opt For more information on passwordaccess see 2 Start the backup archive client dsmc nlm by entering dsmc query session when prompted enter your Tivoli Storage Manager node name and password to authenticate with the server 3 To authenticate with the NetWare TSA enter dsmc query tsa when prompted enter your NetWare user ID and password to authenticate with the NetWare server 4 If you have NDS installed enter dsmc query tsa nds when prompted enter your NetWare
310. tered during options processing prevails If you specify quiet verbose verbose prevails If you specify verbose quiet quiet prevails Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt VErbose gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Options file verbose Command line verbose This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 145 Virtualhodename The virtualnodename option specifies the node name of your workstation when you want to restore or retrieve files to a different workstation When you use the virtualnodename option in your client options file or with a command e You must specify the name you specified with the nodename option in your client options file dsm opt This name should be different from the name returned by the hostname command on your workstation e Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for the password assigned to the node you specify if a password is required If you enter the correct password you have access to all backups and archives that originated from the specified node When connecting to a server the client must identity itself to the server This login identification is determined in the following ways e If the nodename and v
311. that management class The dirmc option specifies the management class of directories you back up and does not effect archived directories Archived directories are always bound to the default management class The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt DIRMc mgmtclassname gt lt Parameters mgmtclassname Specifies the name of the management class you want to associate with directories The client uses the management class name that you specify for all directories that you back up If you do not specify this option the client associates the management class with the longest retention period with directories Examples Options file dirm managdir Command line Does not apply 86 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Domain The domain option specifies the volumes that you want to include for incremental backup in your client domain Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Use the domain option in your client options file to define your default client domain Tivoli Storage Manager uses your default client domain in the following situations to determine which volumes to process during an incremental backup e When you run an incremental backup using the incremental command and you do not spe
312. the file include exclude file A file containing statements to determine the files to back up and the associated management classes to use for backup or archive See include exclude list 248 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide include exclude list A list of include and exclude options that include or exclude selected files for backup An exclude option identifies files that should not be backed up An include option identifies files that are exempt from the exclusion rules or assigns a management class to a file or a group of files for backup or archive services The include exclude list is defined in one or more include exclude files or in the client options file The include exclude list may contain entries from any or all of the following sources the client options file Windows the client system options file Unix separate include exclude files or the Tivoli Storage Manager server See options file incremental backup A function that permits user to back up new or changed files or directories from a client domain or from specified directories or files These directories or files are not excluded in the include exclude list and meet the requirements for frequency mode and serialization as defined by a backup copy group of the management class assigned to each file Contrast with selective backup IPL Initial Program Load See boot and reboot L LAN Local area network Local
313. time decision based on the password access option setting the user ID and the executables access privileges to run this program The file that contains this program must have the s bit set in its mode field and the owner must be root V version Storage management policy may allow back level copies of backed up objects to be kept at the server whenever an object is newly backed up The most recent backed up copy is called the active version Earlier copies are inactive versions The following backup copy group attributes define version criteria versions data exists and versions data deleted W wildcard character An asterisk or question mark character used to represent multiple or single characters when searching for various combinations of characters in alphanumeric and symbolic names windowed interface A type of user interface that is either a graphical user interface or a text based interface The text based interface maintains a close affinity to the graphical user interface including action bars and their associated pull down menus and windows See graphical user interface workstation A programmable high level workstation usually on a network with its own processing hardware such as a high performance personal computer In a local area network a personal computer that acts as a single user or client A workstation can also be used as a server world wide name A unique 48 or 64 bit number assigne
314. tion of these diagrams Detailed descriptions of the option parameters If the parameter is a constant a value that does not change use the minimum abbreviation Examples of using the option in the client options file Examples of using the option on the command line if applicable Options with a command line example of Does not apply cannot be used with command line or scheduled commands Note For options with a yes parameter acceptable alternatives are 1 true and on For options with a no parameter acceptable alternatives are 0 false and off Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 77 Changingretries 78 The changingretries option specifies how many additional times you want the client to attempt to back up or archive a file that is in use Use this option with the archive incremental and selective commands Use this option only when serialization an attribute in a management class copy group is shared static or shared dynamic With shared static serialization if a file is open during an operation the operation repeats the number of times that you specify If the file is open during each attempt the operation does not complete With shared dynamic serialization if a file is open during an operation the operation repeats the number of times that you specify The backup or archive occurs during the last attempt whether the file is open or not If the open file has the share flag set to deny_read the client
315. tions with a command e Enter a command a dash the option name an equal sign and the option value or parameter There should be no spaces on either side of the sign For example dsmc archive description Project A sys usr home proj1 e For options that do not include parameters enter a command a dash and the option name For example dsmc incremental quiet e Enter either the option name or an abbreviation for the option name For example to enter the latest option enter either lat or latest The capital letters in the syntax of each option indicate the minimum abbreviation for that option name To understand how to read the syntax diagrams see Syntax Diagrams on page xii e Enter options in any order before or after command parameters For example you can enter the subdir option before or after a file specification dsmc selective subdir yes sys usr home projl dsmc selective sys usr home projl subdir yes e Separate options with a blank space when you enter more than one option in a command e Enclose the option parameter in quotes if it contains a blank space dsmc archive description Project A sys usr home proj1 The maximum number of characters for a file name is 256 The maximum combined length of the file name and path name is 512 characters Table 26 Client Command Options Command Option Description Commands Page archmc Overrides the default management archive ksa
316. to perform backups but extra time on the weekends you can perform an incremental by date backup on weekdays and a full incremental backup on weekends to maintain current server storage of your NetWare server files If you are running NetWare Btrieve on your NetWare server or any other server based database stop the database application before backing up the files associated with the database Many database applications place locks on files that can prevent Tivoli Storage Manager from backing them up Because Tivoli Storage Manager is a Storage Management Services SMS backup application it supports database Target Service Agents TSAs as soon as they are available This allows Tivoli Storage Manager to maintain database integrity without manual interaction If Tivoli Storage Manager refuses to back up a file check to see if it is marked for execute only or it is opened and locked by another user If the incremental command is retried because of a communication failure or session loss the transfer statistics will display the number of bytes Tivoli Storage Manager attempted to transfer during all command attempts Therefore the statistics for bytes transferred may not match the file statistics such as those for file size Chapter 11 Using Commands 195 Syntax gt gt Incremental Y gt lt aiton filespec filespacename Parameters options You can use these command line options w
317. to the server as an administrator Administrators may possess one or more privilege classes Administrators can use the administrative client to enter Tivoli Storage Manager server commands and queries according to their privileges aggregate data transfer rate Dividing the total number of bytes transferred by the elapsed processing time calculates the data transfer rate archive A function permitting users to copy one or more files to a long term storage device Archive copies can e Carry associated descriptive information e Be compressed to minimize storage requirements e Be retrieved by archive date file name or description Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 245 Contrast with retrieve archive copy A file or group of files residing in an archive storage pool in Tivoli Storage Manager storage archive copy group A policy object containing attributes that control the generation destination and expiration of archived files The archive copy group belongs to a management class archive retention grace period The number of days Tivoli Storage Manager retains an archived copy when the server is unable to rebind the file to an appropriate management class authentication The process of checking and authorizing a user s password before permitting user access to the Tivoli Storage Manager server An administrator with system privilege can enable or disable authentication authorization rule A specification permitting another user to
318. torage Manager NetWare Backup and Recovery Guide 237 LOAD DSREPAIR and choose the Unattended Full Repair option This automatically purges invalid trustee assignments 6 Install Tivoli Storage Manager and reestablish the communications protocol Use the NWCONFIG NLM utility to reinstall the Tivoli Storage Manager code on the NetWare server Reconfigure the communications protocol so that the Tivoli Storage Manager client can communicate with the Tivoli Storage Manager server 7 Load the necessary SMS target service agents At the target NetWare server console enter load tsands load tsa500 NetWare 5 or load tsa60Q NetWare 6 8 The following steps are necessary if the server specific information was not restored from a backup a Delete any objects which had server specific references See Ds an page 20 for more information about objects which reference the server object b Replace the objects which contained references to the failed Server and Volume objects You can do this by restoring the entire NDS using the following command at the NetWare console load dsmc restore directory replace yes The replace yes option ensures that place holders created by the restore process are properly replaced by real NDS objects If you are not comfortable with replacing the entire NDS you can selectively restore each object or manually recreate the objects with NWADMIN or NETADMIN 9 Restore the volume s using Tivoli Storage Manager
319. tribute specifies how many days all but the most recent backup version is retained The most recent version is the active version and active versions are never erased If Nolimit is specified extra backup versions are deleted based on the versions data exists or the versions data deleted parameter settings Retain Only Version The Retain Only Version attribute specifies the number of days the last remaining inactive version of a file or directory is retained If Nolimit is specified the last version is retained indefinitely This parameter goes into effect during the next incremental backup after a file is deleted from the client machine Any subsequent updates to this parameter will not affect files that are already inactive For example If this parameter is set to 10 days when a file is inactivated during an incremental backup the file will be expired in 10 days Copy Serialization The Copy Serialization attribute determines whether a file can be in use during a backup or archive and what to do if it is The value for this attribute can be one of the following e Static A file or directory must not be modified during a backup or archive If the object is changed during a backup or archive attempt it is not backed up or archived e Shared static A file or directory must not be modified during backup or archive Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to perform a backup or archive as many as four additional times depending on the value
320. trieve 72 setting 6 specifying in commands 75 transaction processing 75 Web client 75 processing transactions 144 processorutilization option 119 pruning error log 92 Q query include exclude list 205 query access command 200 query archive command 201 query backup command 202 query backupset command 203 query filespace command 204 query inclexcl command 205 query mgmtclass command 206 query restore command 207 query schedule command 208 query session command 209 query TSA command 210 queryschedperiod option 120 quiet option 121 R rebinding files to a different management class 66 recall commands 185 registering client with server 7 using closed registration 7 using open registration 7 remote NetWare servers accessing 15 remote servers requesting backup archive services 39 replace option 122 required parameters 184 resourceutilization option 123 restart restore command 213 restartable restore 41 restartable restore sessions display 207 restore adisk 48 active version 45 backup sets overview 46 supported tape devices 216 from portable media overview 46 inactive version 45 large number of files 43 local backup set via GUI 46 maximum file size 185 multiple restore commands 43 no query 41 point in time restore 44 sorting file list 24 summary of options 72 using the Web client 20 restore backupset command 216 restore command 214 restoring files active version 42 another node s files 47 authorizing anoth
321. turn code of the scheduled event 2 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 3 The server can also define the postschedulecmd option Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt POSTSchedulecmd cmdstring gt lt Parameters cmdstring Specifies the command to process You can enter a command to be executed after a schedule with this option Use only one postschedulecmd option Use a blank or null string for cmdstring if you want to prevent any commands from running that the administrator uses for postschedulecmd or preschedulecmd If you specify a blank or null string on either option it prevents the administrator from using a command on both options If your administrator uses a blank or null string on the postschedulecmd option you cannot run a post schedule command If the command string contains blanks enclose the command string in double quotes If you placed double quotes within the command string then enclose the entire command string in single quotes Examples Options file postschedulecmd restart database The command string is a valid command for restarting your database Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Using Processing Options 117 Preschedulecmd The preschedulecmd option specifies a command that the client program processes before it runs a schedule The client program waits for the command to c
322. u can recover your files If you also lose the disk that contains the operating system and communication software you must recover them before you can connect to the server Note Data can be restored from a backup set stored on local drives or TAT media without setting up communication with server See To protect yourself against these kinds of losses put together a set of diskettes that you can use to restore your system to a state that permits you to contact the server and begin recovering data These diskettes should contain 1 A bootable operating system that permits you to perform basic functions 2 A correctly configured communication program that will allow you to establish communications with the server 3 A client with an appropriately customized options file The exact files you need differ depending on the communication package you use Consult your operating system and communication software manuals for help in setting up these diskettes Deleting File Spaces If your administrator gives you backdelete authority you can delete entire file spaces from the server When you delete a file space you delete all the files both backup versions and archive copies that are contained within the file space Carefully consider what you are doing before you attempt to delete a file space You cannot delete individual backup versions kept on the server If you decide you do not need the file space use the delete file space
323. u want Tivoli Storage Manager to save the user ID and password you provide when prompted If you set nwpwfile to yes the first time you issue a command to back up or archive files for a local or remote NetWare server Tivoli Storage Manager encrypts the user ID and password you provide and stores that information in the TSM PWD file in your installation directory When you issue subsequent commands to back up or archive files for that server Tivoli Storage Manager obtains the password information from that file instead of issuing a prompt This is the default for this option If you are running in loop mode the password is committed to system memory In loop mode other commands will then access the ID password from memory If you set nwpwfile to no Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for the user IDs and passwords for local or remote NetWare servers each time you issue a command to back up or archive files stored on those servers You can include volumes stored on remote NetWare file servers in your default client domain specified with the domain option in your client options file For example to specify the sys volume on three remote NetWare file servers as well as all local volumes and the NDS use domain all local servb sys servc sys servd sys You can also use the domain option with the incremental command to specify volumes stored on remote NetWare file servers For example load dsmc incremental domain servb sys servc sys
324. ude all files with an extension of bak exclude servera bak except those found on servera in the include servera one dev bak one dev directory Exclude all files and directories under any exclude servera tmp tmp directory that might exist on servera include servera vol tmp save fil except for the file vol tmp save fil Include this file Exclude any obj file in any directory on exclude servera volume ce g volumec volumee volumef and volumeg obj Exclude the obj files found in the root exclude servera volumed obj directory in the volumed drive only Exclude any file that resides under the tmp exclude servera tmp directory found in any file space on any volume Exclude the servera volumed mydir test1 exclude dir servera volumed mydir directory and any files and subdirectories testl under it Exclude all directories under the mydir exclude dir servera volumed mydir directory with names beginning with test test Exclude all directories directly under the exclude dir servera mydir test mydir directory with names beginning with test on any volume Processing Include and Exclude Options The Tivoli Storage Manager server can define include exclude options using the inclexcl parameter in a client option set The include exclude statements specified by the server are evaluated along with those in the client options file dsm opt The server include exclude statements are
325. uding from selective backup 40 restrictions on processing during incremental backup 30 restrictions on processing during incremental by date 31 directory archive using Web client 50 management classes 86 retrieve using Web client 52 specifying 184 dirmc option 86 dirsonly option 157 disaster recovery 48 disk restore 48 disk space requirements NetWare client 2 displaying active backup versions 24 archived files 201 backed up files 202 file details 38 inactive backup versions 24 254 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide displaying continued inactive backups 45 messages 145 messages stopping 121 online help 25 restartable restore sessions 207 scheduled events 208 session information 209 TSA information 210 domain option 87 dsm opt file creating and modiying 5 required options for 5 dsm smp file copying to dsm opt 5 location 5 dsmsched log file 56 dynamic and shared serialization 62 E editor option 89 encrypting file data 27 encryption excluding files 93 saving encryption key password 90 encryptkey 27 encryptkey option 90 ending a command line session 25 entering client commands 183 entering commands 186 environment prerequisites NetWare client 2 error log pruning 92 error processing summary of options 74 errorlogname option 91 errorlogretention option 92 exclude option exclude archive 8 exclude backup 8 exclude compression 8 exclude dir 8 exclude file
326. uling options Also called the client system options file e TSM User Preferences file For the Macintosh client only Identifies Tivoli Storage Manager servers specifies communication methods defines scheduling options selects backup archive restore and retrieve options Also called the client options file e TSM System Preferences file For the Macintosh client only Contains stanzas describing Tivoli Storage Manager servers to contact for services These stanzas also specify communication methods backup and archive options and select scheduling options owner The owner of backup archive files sent from a multi user client node such as AIX P pattern matching character See wildcard character plug in A self contained software component that modifies adds or changes function in a particular software system When you add a plug in to a software system the foundation of the original software system remains intact policy domain A policy object that contains one or more policy sets Client nodes are associated with a policy domain See policy set management class and copy group policy set A policy object that contains a group of management class definitions that exist for a policy domain At any one time there can be many policy sets within a policy domain but only one policy set can be active See active policy set and management class progress indicator A control used to inform a user about the progress of a process
327. ultiple restore sessions for no query restore operations increasing the speed of restores This is similar to the multiple backup session support It exploits the mount point available on the server If data is backed up on multiple tapes and if the server has multiple mount points available then the restore starts a session for each tape up to the number your administrator configures See for more information Consistent Client Return Codes Reliable consistent and documented return codes have been added to the command line client and the scheduler This facilitates automation of client operations via user written scripts By using the QUERY EVENT command with the FORMAT DETAILED option administrators can now distinguish between scheduled backups that completed successfully with no skipped files and scheduled backups that completed successfully with one or more skipped files Also if you use the processing optionpreschedulecmd to run a command and that command returns a non zero return code the scheduled event will not run This ensures that scheduled events_will not run if prerequisite commands do not complete S See rom a q q q X Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 xvii xviii Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Chapter 1 Installing IBM Tivoli Storage Manager The IBM Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive client helps you protect information on your NetWare server As a
328. unt of metadata in the server database increasing database aun th and decreasing performance for operations such as expiration See et on page 46 for more information on how Sane sets can be senceaied and restored Archive copies are more permanent They maintain a file in a particular state indefinitely although your administrator can limit how long archives are kept The server can store an unlimited number of archive versions of a file Archives are useful if you need to go back to a particular version of your files or you want to delete a file from your NetWare server and retrieve it at a later time if necessary For example you might need to save spreadsheets for tax purposes but because you are not using them you do not want to leave them on your NetWare server 49 for more information about achiving and Tog files Use backups to protect against unforeseen damage to your files and use archives for maintaining more permanent versions of your files Backing Up Files and Directories Your administrator might have set up schedules to back up files on your NetWare server automatically See Cha A a for information on checking and running the schedules available to you The pllgwine sections discuss how to back up files without using a schedule 28 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Understanding Which Files are Backed Up When you request an incremental backup
329. uring backup or archive e shared static If data in the file or directory changes during each of the allowed attempts to back up or archive it it is not backed up or archived The value of the changingretries option determines how many attempts are made The default is 4 e dynamic The object is backed up or archived on the first attempt whether or not data changes during the process e shared dynamic The object is backed up or archived on the last attempt even if data changes during the process Using the include option in an include exclude list you can assign the default management class to a file You can also assign a specific management class to a file You can perform either a full incremental backup or an incremental by date backup The default is a full incremental backup You can also use the selective command to perform a selective backup that backs up only the files directories or empty directories that you specify For more O A full incremental backs up all files or directories that are new or have changed since the last incremental backup During a full incremental backup the client queries the server to determine the exact condition of your storage Tivoli Storage Manager uses this information to e Back up new files or directories e Back up files or directories whose contents have changed 194 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide e Mark inactive backup ver
330. user ID and password to authenticate with the NetWare tree under which the NetWare server belongs 5 Install the Client Acceptor Service by entering the following command dsmcutil install cad name TSM CAD node nodename password password 6 Install the Remote Client Agent Service by entering the following command dsmcutil install remoteagent name TSM AGENT node nodename password password partnername TSM CAD 7 Start the client acceptor program by entering dsmcad from the NetWare console The remote client agent program dsmagent nlm starts automatically when needed The only options you can use with the dsmcad command are optfile and httpport All Web client messages are written to the Web client log file dsmwebcl 10g Error messages are written to the error log file dsmerror 1og or the file you specify with the errorlogname option The dsmwebcl log and dsmerror log files 22 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide 8 To access the Web client from a network that is DNS enabled enter the following URL from any supported browser http your_machine_name 1581 To access the Web client from a network that is not DNS enabled enter the following URL from any supported browser http your_machine_IP_address 1581 where your_machine_name and your_machine_IP_address is the host name and the IP address respectively of the machine running the Web client Port 158
331. ust be registered with your Tivoli Storage Manager server Restoring or Retrieving Files from Another Client Node If you want to restore files backed up or retrieve files archived by another NetWare client node then you need access to those files as described in Anothe en e If you are granted access to files backed up by a different client node you can restore those files by using the fromnode option with the restore command For example you could enter the following load dsmc res fromnode nw2 servb sys home proj serva sys home proj where nw2 is the node name for another NetWare server servb sys home proj indicates the name of the server and the files you want to restore and serva sys home proj indicates where you want to place the files you are restoring You must specify a destination or Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to restore the files to the server from which the files were backed up You can retrieve archived files in the same way using the retrieve command For more information about the fromnode option see For more information about using the fromnode option with the restore command Restoring or Retrieving Your Files to Another Client Node Tivoli Storage Manager lets you restore files you backed up or retrieve files you archived from your own NetWare server when you are using a different NetWare server You must enter your node name because your backups and archives are stored according to your n
332. ut not all of the changes If that is not acceptable select a management class that creates a backup version or archive copy only if the file does not change during a backup or archive If you restore or retrieve a file that contains a fuzzy copy the file might not be usable Copy Mode The Copy Mode attribute determines whether a file or directory is considered for incremental backup regardless of whether it changed or not since the last backup Tivoli Storage Manager does not check the mode for selective backups The value for this parameter can be one of the following e Modified The file is considered for incremental backup only if it has changed since the last backup A file is considered changed if any of the following are true The date or time of the last modification is different The file size is different The file attributes with the exception of archive are different However if only the file meta data changes such as access permissions but the file data does not change Tivoli Storage Manager may back up only the meta data The trustee rights are different e Absolute The file is considered for incremental backup regardless of whether it changed since the last backup For archive copy groups the mode is always absolute indicating that a file is archived regardless of whether it changed since the last archive request Copy Destination Names the destination where backups or archives are stored The destination ca
333. value that indicates a file is considered for incremental backup even though the file has not changed since the last time it was backed up See mode Contrast with modified access control list ACL 1 In computer security a collection of all access rights for one object 2 In computer security a list associated with an object that identifies all the subjects that can access the object and their access rights for example a list associated with a file that identifies users who can access the file and identifies their access rights to that file ACL access control list active policy set The policy set within a policy domain that contains the most recently activated policy All client nodes assigned to the current policy domain use this policy set See policy set active version The most recent backup copy of a file stored in Tivoli Storage Manager storage for a file that currently exists on a file server or workstation An active version remains active and exempt from deletion until e Replaced by a new backup version e Tivoli Storage Manager detects during an incremental backup that the user has deleted the original file from a file server or workstation administrative client A program that runs on a file server workstation or mainframe This program lets administrators monitor and control Tivoli Storage Manager servers using administrator commands Contrast with backup archive client administrator A user who is registered
334. ver Network Replica not present Example 3 Loss of an Entite NDS Thee Print Queues B a e wa 2 Notices 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 213 214 216 218 220 221 x 223 225 227 227 227 228 228 228 228 229 230 230 230 231 232 232 lt 232 232 233 233 234 234 234 234 239 2239 236 236 237 238 240 240 243 Contents V Glossary 245 Index 2 ee ew ee es 253 Vi Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide Tables ae 10 11 12 13 14 Typographical Conventions k Tivoli Storage Manager Client Publications Tivoli Storage Manager Server Quick Start Publications Option for Excluding Directories Options for Controlling Backup and Archive Processing Options for Controlling Compression and Encryption Processing Wildcard and Other Special Characters Using Wildcard Characters with Include and Exclude Patterns wea a s a G Backing Up Your Data Preliminary Steps for Backing Up Files Restoring Your Data a Archiving and Retrieving Files Return Codes and Meanings Default Values in the Standard Management Class Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 xi XV wo 10 10 2 lt 27 27 41 49 54 61 15 16 T7 18 19 20 21
335. vices When an application is registered with a server as a client node the application can back up restore archive and retrieve objects from storage e A Web backup archive client that permits an authorized administrator help desk person or end user to perform backup restore archive and retrieve services using a Web browser on a remote machine This book explains how to install the Tivoli Storage Manager clients and how to perform initial setup tasks For information about installation and levels of operating systems that are supported refer to the installation chapter for your client For information about environment variables refer to the environment variables section for your client This book provides information to help you set up and use the backup archive client on your workstation You should be familiar with your workstation your operating system and your basic system administration Tivoli Storage Manager books are translated into other languages Contact your Tivoli Storage Manager representative for a list of available translations Conventions Used in This Book This book uses the following typographical conventions Table 1 Typographical Conventions Example Description dsmc nim A series of lowercase letters with an extension indicates Tivoli Storage Manager program file names archive Boldface type indicates a command that you type at a workstation such as a command you type on a command line
336. volume This will ensure that NetWare converts Macintosh file names to the Long name before the file is backed up The Macintosh namespace information is not lost when backing up or restoring a Macintosh file The only issue is how the client will display the name when performing a query restore or retrieve operation Migration to the Long Name Space Using the Long name space allows greater flexibility for backing up files whose names are longer than traditional DOS names To determine the name spaces that are loaded on a volume enter volumes at the NetWare console for example PROD1 volumes Information displays which is similar to the following Mounted Volumes Name Spaces Flags SYS DOS LONG Cp Sa VOL1 DOS MAC LONG Cp SA PROD1 In this example server PROD1 has 2 volumes The SYS volume has DOS and long name spaces VOL1 has DOS Mac and long name spaces The Tivoli Storage Manager client inspects these settings when it begins an operation such as backup The client then determines the name space used by the backed up volume For example 32 Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation and User s Guide tsm gt q file Node Name VONORE Session established with server TSM Windows NT Server Version 5 Release 1 Level 0 Server date time 02 05 1999 05 59 45 Last access 02 04 1999 18 34 09 Num Last incr Date Type File Space Name 1 02 04 1999 18 34 46 NTWFS PROD1 VOL1 tsm gt
337. ys ann use file spec sys ann To specify all files in all directories off the root directory enter sys on the command line Enter sys on one set access command and sys on another if you want another user to have complete access to your file space The first sys gives access to all subdirectories and all files off the root directory node Specifies the client node of the user to whom you are giving access Use wildcards to give access to more than one node with similar node names Use an asterisk to give access to all nodes Chapter 11 Using Commands 223 A node name that begins with a or a character must be contained within single or double quotes If the node parameter is specified when the set access command is run in batch mode the node name must be contained within both sets of quotes For example dsmc set access backup sys testnode user Specifies the name of the user to whom you are giving access Use a single asterisk or omit this parameter to give access to all users at the specified node options See Cha g age 69 for information about common options that you can use with this command Examples Task Give the user at node_2 authority to restore the budget file from the sys user directory Command dsmc set access backup sys budget node 2 Task Give node_3 authority to retrieve all files in the sys devel proja directory whose file names end with sys Command ds

Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup-Archive Client

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents